BMW - X5 sDrive35i - Owners Manual - 2013 - 2013

Contents Owner's Manual for Vehicle A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine THE BMW X5. OWNER'S MANUAL. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 X5 Owner's Manual for Vehicle Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐ tains important information on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features available in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐ hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual are located in the appendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. Supplementary information can be found in the additional bro‐ chures in the onboard literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable drive. BMW AG Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 © 2013 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English X/13, 11 13 490 Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Contents The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to page 254. 6 Notes At a glance 14 18 26 29 Cockpit iDrive Voice activation system Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 204 206 211 222 224 227 229 231 239 244 Refueling Fuel Wheels and tires Engine compartment Engine oil Coolant Maintenance Replacing components Breakdown assistance Care Reference Controls 34 50 63 67 82 99 104 131 138 165 175 182 Mobility Opening and closing Adjusting Transporting children safely Driving Displays Lamps Safety Driving stability control systems Driving comfort Climate control Interior equipment Storage compartments 250 Technical data 254 Everything from A to Z Driving tips 190 Things to remember when driving 194 Loading 197 Saving fuel Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Notes Notes Using this Owner's Manual ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice ac‐ tivation system. Orientation ››...‹‹ Identifies the answers generated by the voice activation system. The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ ular topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. User's manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication and the short commands of the voice activation system are described in a sep‐ arate user's manual, which is also included with the onboard literature. Additional sources of information The service center will be happy to answer any other questions you may have. Information on BMW, e.g., on technology, is available on the Internet: bmwusa.com. Symbols in the Owner's Manual Indicates precautions that must be followed precisely in order to avoid the possibility of personal injury and serious damage to the ve‐ hicle. ◄ Marks the end of a specific item of informa‐ tion. "..." Identifies Control Display texts used to se‐ lect individual functions. 6 Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rele‐ vant section of this Owner's Manual for infor‐ mation on a particular part or assembly. Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series. Therefore, in this Owner's Manual, equipment is also described and illustrated that is not available in your vehicle, e.g., because of the selected optional equipment or the countryspecific variants. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Handbook, refer to the Supple‐ mentary Owner's Handbooks. On right-hand drive vehicles, some controls are arranged differently than shown in the illus‐ trations. Status of the Owner's Manual Basic information The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a policy of constant development that is con‐ ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety stan‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Notes dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. Updates made after the editorial deadline Any updates made after the editorial deadline for the Owner's Manuals are located in the ap‐ pendix of the printed quick reference for the vehicle. For your own safety Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the operating conditions and registration require‐ ments applying in the country of first delivery homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing oper‐ ating conditions and permit requirements. If your vehicle does not comply with the homolo‐ gation requirements in a certain country you cannot lodge warranty claims for your vehicle there. Further information can be obtained from your Service Centre. Parts and Accessories BMW recommends using parts and accessories approved by BMW for this purpose. Your BMW center is the right contact for genuine BMW parts and accessories, other products approved by BMW and related qualified advice. BMW has tested these products for safety and suitability in relation to BMW vehicles. BMW can assume responsibility for them. However, we cannot assume any responsibility whatsoever for parts and accessories that have not been specifically approved by BMW. BMW cannot evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard. This guarantee is also not applicable when country-specific government approval has been granted. Testing of this kind may fail to embrace the entire range of potential operating conditions to which components might be exposed on BMW vehicles. Such products could conceivably fail to comply with BMW's own stringent quality standards. Maintenance and repairs California Proposition 65 Warning Advanced technology, e.g., the use of modern materials and high-performance electronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair methods. California laws require us to state the following warning: Therefore, have this work performed only by a BMW center or a workshop that works accord‐ ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri‐ ately trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 7 Notes chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ lowing warranties: ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐ ranty. ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ ited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating con‐ ditions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to de‐ liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is operated under those conditions. If you wish to operate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ hicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and homologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for further information. Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 8 Specifications for required maintenance meas‐ ures: ▷ BMW Maintenance system ▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models If the vehicle is not maintained according to these specifications, this could result in seri‐ ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Data memory Many electronic components on your vehicle are equipped with data memories that tempo‐ rarily or permanently store technical informa‐ tion about the condition of the vehicle, events and faults. This technical information generally documents the state of a component, a mod‐ ule, a system or the environment: ▷ Operating states of system components, fill levels for instance. ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and from its individual components, e.g., wheel rota‐ tion speed/ vehicle speed, deceleration, transverse acceleration. ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐ tem components, e.g., lights and brakes. ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐ tions, e.g., deployment of an airbag, en‐ gagement of stability control systems. ▷ Ambient conditions, such as temperature. This data is purely technical in nature and is used to detect and correct faults and to opti‐ mize vehicle functions. Motion profiles over routes traveled cannot be created from this data. When service offerings are used, e.g., re‐ pair services, service processes, warranty claims, quality assurance, this technical infor‐ mation can be read out from the event and fault memories by the service personnel, in‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Notes cluding the manufacturer, using special diag‐ nostic tools. You can obtain further information there if it is needed. After a fault is corrected, the information in the fault memory is deleted or overwritten on a continuous basis. When the vehicle is in use, situations are con‐ ceivable in which it might be possible to asso‐ ciate this technical data with individuals if it is combined with other information, e.g., an acci‐ dent report, damage to the vehicle, eye wit‐ ness accounts — possibly with the assistance of an expert. Additional functions that are contractually agreed with the customer, such as vehicle lo‐ cating in an emergency, enable certain vehicle data to be transmitted from the vehicle. recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data, e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐ quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐ cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐ hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Reporting safety defects Event Data Recorder EDR For US customers This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were operating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better under‐ standing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause in‐ jury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐ tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐ wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐ ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐ formation about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 9 Notes For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐ fect Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehi‐ cle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Notes Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 11 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 At a glance These overviews of buttons, switches and displays are intended to familiarize you with your vehicle. You will also become quickly acquainted with the available control concepts and options. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 At a glance Cockpit Cockpit Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. All around the steering wheel 1 Rear window safety switch 47 2 Power windows 46 3 Exterior mirror operation 60 4 Opening and closing top tail‐ gate 40 5 Unlocking central locking sys‐ tem 40 Locking central locking sys‐ tem 40 6 Lamps 14 Front fog lamps 102 Parking lamps 99 Low beams 99 Automatic headlamp con‐ trol 100 Daytime running lights 100 Adaptive Light Control 100 High-beam Assistant 101 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Cockpit Instrument lighting 102 At a glance 10 Instrument cluster 82 11 Steering wheel buttons, right Entertainment source Night Vision, switch on/switch off heat image 121 7 Volume Steering column stalk, left Turn signal 74 Voice activation 26 High beams, head‐ lamp flasher 74 Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication High-beam Assistant 101 Thumbwheel for selection lists 93 Roadside parking lamps 100 12 Steering column stalk, right Windshield wipers 75 Computer 93 Rain sensor 75 8 Steering wheel buttons, left Store speed 148, 138 Clean the windshields and head‐ lamps 75 Resume speed 150, 141 Rear window wiper in Canadian models 77 Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing 138 Rear window wiper 77 Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing 149 Cleaning rear window 77 Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause 145 13 Start/stop the engine and switch the ignition on/off 68 Congestion Assistant: setting cruise control distance 138 14 Auto Start/Stop function 69 Cruise control, reduce dis‐ tance 138 15 Horn Cruise control, increase dis‐ tance 138 Cruise control rocker switch 149, 140 9 16 Steering wheel heating 62 17 Adjust steering wheel 61 Shift paddles 80 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 15 At a glance Cockpit 18 Unlock hood 222 All around the center console 1 All around the headliner 17 2 Control Display 18 3 Glove compartment 182 4 Ventilation 168 5 10 11 Auto Hold 72 PDC Park Distance Control 150 Rearview camera 153 Hazard warning system 239 Top View 156 Parking assistant 159 Intelligent Safety button 112 6 Automatic climate control 165 7 Radio/CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐ nication 8 Controller with buttons 18 9 Parking brake 71 16 Panorama View 158 HDC Hill Descent Control 133 12 Driving Dynamics Control 135 13 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 132 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Cockpit At a glance 14 Transmission selector lever 78 All around the headliner 1 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 239 4 Reading lamps 103 2 Panoramic glass sunroof 48 5 Interior lamps 103 3 Indicator lamp, front passenger airbag 106 6 Glasses compartment 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 17 At a glance iDrive iDrive Vehicle equipment Control Display All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Hints ▷ To clean the Control Display, follow the care instructions. ▷ Do not place objects close to the Control Display; otherwise, the Control Display can be damaged. Switching off The concept The iDrive combines the functions of a multi‐ tude of switches. Thus, these functions can be operated from a central location. 1. Press the button. 2. "Switch off control display" Using the iDrive during a trip To avoid becoming distracted and pos‐ ing an unnecessary hazard to your vehicle's occupants and to other road users, never at‐ tempt to use the controls or enter information unless traffic and road conditions allow this.◀ Controls at a glance Switching on Controls Press the controller again to switch the screen back on. Controller with navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller. 1 Control Display 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on the equipment version, with touchpad 18 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 iDrive 1. Turn. At a glance Press the but‐ ton Function TEL Opens the Telephone menu. BACK Displays the previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. Controller without navigation system The buttons can be used to open the menus directly. The controller can be used to select menu items and create the settings. 2. Press. 1. Turn. 3. Move in four directions. 2. Press. Buttons on controller Press the but‐ ton Function MENU Open the main menu. RADIO Opens the Radio menu. MEDIA Opens the CD/Multimedia menu. NAV Opens the Navigation menu. 3. Move in two directions. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 19 At a glance iDrive Buttons on controller Selecting menu items Highlighted menu items can be selected. Press the but‐ Function ton MENU Open the main menu. Audio Open audio menu last lis‐ tened to, switch between au‐ dio menus. TEL Opens the Telephone menu. BACK Open previous panel. OPTION Opens the Options menu. 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. 2. Press the controller. Operating concept Menu items in the Owner's Manual Opening the main menu In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be selected are set in quotation marks, e.g., "Settings". Press the button. Changing between panels After a menu item is selected, e.g., "Radio", a new panel is displayed. Panels can overlap. ▷ Move the controller to the left. The current panel is closed and the previ‐ ous panel is displayed. The main menu is displayed. All iDrive functions can be called up via the main menu. 20 The previous panel is opened again by pressing the BACK button. In this case, the current panel is not closed. ▷ Move the controller to the right. A new panel is opened on top of the previ‐ ous display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 iDrive White arrows pointing to the left or right indi‐ cate that additional panels can be opened. At a glance 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is displayed. View of an opened menu When a menu is opened, it generally opens with the panel that was last selected in that menu. To display the first panel of a menu: ▷ Move the controller to the left repeatedly until the first panel is displayed. ▷ Press the menu button on the controller twice. Opening the Options menu Press the button. The "Options" menu is displayed. 3. Press the controller. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. The function is activated. The function is deactivated. Touchpad Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the controller: Additional options: move the controller to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Touchpad" Options menu The "Options" menu consists of various areas: ▷ Screen settings, e.g., "Split screen". This area remains unchanged. ▷ Control options for the selected main menu, e.g., for "Radio". ▷ If applicable, further operating options for the selected menu, e.g., "Store station". Changing settings 1. Select a field. Selecting functions 1. "Settings" 3. Select the desired function. ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers. ▷ "Interactive map": operating the inter‐ active map. ▷ "Browser": enter Internet addresses. ▷ "Audio feedback": the entered letters and numbers are announced. Entering letters and numbers The entry of the letters requires some practice at the beginning. In the entry, pay attention to the following: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 21 At a glance iDrive ▷ For the input of upper/lower case letters and numbers, it may be necessary to switch via the controller to the correspond‐ ing Input mode, refer to page 25, e.g. when the spelling of upper and lower case letters is identical. Changing settings Settings on the control display, such as the volume, can be made via the touchpad. To do this slide to the left or right accordingly. ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. Example: setting the clock ▷ Always enter accompanying signs, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. The possibility of input depends on the set language. Where nec‐ essary, enter special characters via the controller. Setting the clock 1. Press the button. The main menu is displayed. 2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. ▷ To delete a character, slide to the left on the touchpad. ▷ To enter a blank space, slide to the right in the center of the touchpad. ▷ To enter a hyphen, slide to the right in the upper area of the touchpad. ▷ To enter an underscore, slide to the right in the lower area of the touchpad. Using interactive map and Internet The interactive map in the navigation system and Internet sites can be moved via the touch‐ pad. Function Controls Move interactive map or Internet sites. Slide in the corre‐ sponding direction. Enlarge/shrink interac‐ tive map or Internet sites. Drag inwards or outwards on the touchpad with the fingers. Display the menu or open a link in the Inter‐ net. Tap once. 22 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left to display "Time/Date". 4. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is highlighted, and then press the controller. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 iDrive 5. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high‐ lighted, and then press the controller. At a glance Telephone symbols Symbol Meaning Incoming or outgoing call. Missed call. Wireless network reception strength Symbol flashes: searching for network. Wireless network is not available. 6. Turn the controller to set the hours and press the controller. 7. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller. Bluetooth is switched on. Roaming is active. Text message was received. Check the SIM card. Status information SIM card is blocked. Status field SIM card is missing. The following information is displayed in the status field at the top right: Enter the PIN. ▷ Time. Entertainment symbols ▷ Current entertainment source. ▷ Sound output, on/off. Symbol Meaning ▷ Wireless network reception strength. CD/DVD player. ▷ Telephone status. Music collection. ▷ Traffic bulletin reception. Status field symbols The symbols are grouped as follows. Gracenote® database. AUX-IN port in the front or in the rear. USB audio interface. Radio symbols Mobile phone audio interface. Symbol Meaning Satellite radio is switched on. Additional symbols Symbol Meaning Spoken instructions are switched off. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 23 At a glance iDrive Split screen tions, phone numbers and entry points into the menu. General information The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Additional information can be displayed on the right side of the split screen, e.g., information from the onboard computer. In the divided screen view, the so-called split screen, this information remains visible even when you change to another menu. Switching the split screen on and off 1. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. Running a function Press the button. The function will run immediately. This means, for example, that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Selecting the display 1. Saving a function 1. Highlight the function via the iDrive. Press the button. 2. "Split screen" 3. Move the controller until the split screen is selected. 4. Press the controller or select "Split screen content". Displaying the button assignment Use a finger to touch the buttons. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The key assignment is displayed at the top edge of the screen. 5. Select the desired menu item. ▷ To display short information: touch the button. Programmable memory buttons General information The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, e.g., radio stations, navigation destina‐ 24 ▷ To display detailed information: touch the button for an extended period. Deleting the button assignments 1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for approx. five seconds. 2. "OK" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 iDrive At a glance Entering letters and numbers General information 1. Turn the controller: select letters or num‐ bers. 2. Select additional letters or numbers if needed. 3. "OK": confirm the entry. Symbol Function Press the controller: delete the let‐ ter or number. Press the controller for an extended period: delete all letters or numbers. Switching between cases, letters and numbers Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐ tween entering upper and lower case, letters and numbers: Symbol Function Enter the letters. Enter the numbers. or Move the controller up. Without navigation system Select the symbol. Entry comparison Entry of names and addresses: the selection is narrowed down every time a letter is entered and letters may be added automatically. The entries are continuously compared to the data stored in the vehicle. ▷ Only those letters are offered during the entry for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: town/city names can be entered using the spelling of language available on the Control Display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 25 At a glance Voice activation system Voice activation system Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Using voice activation Activating the voice activation system 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Wait for the signal. 3. Say the command. The command is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. The concept ▷ Most functions that are displayed on the Control Display can be operated by spoken commands via the voice activation system. The system prompts you to make your en‐ tries. ▷ Functions that can only be used when the vehicle is stationary cannot be operated using the voice activation system. ▷ The system uses a special microphone on the driver's side. ▷ ›...‹ Verbal instructions in the Owner's Manual to use with the voice activation system. Requirements Via the Control Display, set a language that is also supported by the voice activation system so that the spoken commands can be identi‐ fied. Set the language, refer to page 96. This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐ cates that the voice activation system is active. If no other commands are available, operate the function in this case via iDrive. Terminating the voice activation system Briefly press the button on the steer‐ ing wheel or ›End‹. Possible commands Most menu items on the Control Display can be voiced as commands. The available commands depend on which menu is currently displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Short commands exist for many functions. Some list entries, e.g., Phone book entries, can also be selected via the voice activation sys‐ tem. Speak these list entries exactly as they are displayed in the respective list. Having possible commands read aloud You can have the available commands read out loud for you: ›commands‹ For example, if the "Settings" menu is dis‐ played, the commands for the settings are read out loud. 26 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Voice activation system Executing functions using short commands Functions on the main menu can be performed directly by means of short commands, nearly irrespective of which menu item is currently selected, e.g., ›Vehicle status‹. List of short commands of the voice activation system, see Navigation, Entertainment, Com‐ munication Owner's Manual. Help dialog for the voice activation system Calling up help dialog: ›Help‹ Additional commands for the help dialog: ▷ ›Help with examples‹: information about the current operating options and the most im‐ portant commands for them are an‐ nounced. ▷ ›Help voice activation‹: information about the principle of operation for the voice acti‐ vation system is announced. At a glance Via short command Playback of the CD can also be started via a short command. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. Setting the voice dialog You can set whether the system should use the standard dialog or a shorter version. In the shorter variant of the voice dialog, the announcements from the system are issued in an abbreviated form. 1. "Settings" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Speech type:" 4. Select the setting. Example: playing back a CD Via the main menu The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the controller. 1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output if necessary. 2. Press the button on the steering wheel. 3. ›Media menu‹ The medium last played is played back. 4. ›C D‹ 5. ›C D drive‹ 6. ›Disc ... Track ...‹, e.g., CD track 4. Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button while giving an in‐ struction until the desired volume is set. ▷ The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. ▷ The volume is stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 27 At a glance Voice activation system Hints on Emergency Requests Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐ tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐ tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change. This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐ ment of a telephone connection. Instead, use the SOS button, refer to page 239, in the vicinity of the interior mirror. Environmental conditions ▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐ sis, and speed. ▷ Always say commands in the language of the voice activation system. ▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐ roof closed to prevent noise interference. ▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. 28 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Vehicle equipment Select components All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. 1. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Press the button. 2. Turn the controller: open "Vehicle Info". 3. Press the controller. 4. Selecting desired range: ▷ "Quick reference" ▷ "Search by pictures" ▷ "Owner's Manual" The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. The equipment and functions that are in the vehicle are descri‐ bed therein. Components of the Integrated Owner's Manual The Integrated Owner's Manual consists of three parts, which offer various levels of infor‐ mation or access possibilities. Leafing through the Owner's Manual Quick Reference Guide Turn the controller until the next or previous page is displayed. Located in the Quick Reference is important information for the operation of the vehicle, the operation of basic vehicle functions or for what to do in the event of a flat tire. This information can also be displayed during driving. Search by pictures Information and descriptions based on illustra‐ tions can be searched via search by pictures. This is helpful, for example, if the description of an outfitting package that cannot be named is needed. Page by page with link access Page by page without link access Leaf through the pages directly while skipping the links. Highlight the symbol once. Now simply press the controller to leaf from page to page. Leaf back. Leaf forward. Owner's Manual Information and descriptions can be searched by direct entry of a search term via the index. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 29 At a glance Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Context help - Owner's Manual to the temporarily selected function The relevant information can be opened di‐ rectly. Programmable memory buttons General information Opening via the iDrive The Owner's Manual can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly. To move directly from the application on the Control Display to the options menu: Storing 1. "Owner's Manual" Select via the iDrive. 1. Press the button or move the control‐ ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: 2. Press the desired button for more than 2 seconds. Executing Press the button. The Owner's Manual is displayed im‐ mediately. "Display Owner's Manual" Changing between a function and the Owner's Manual To change from a function, e.g., radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control Display and to switch between the two displays: 1. Press the button or move the control‐ ler to the right repeatedly until the "Options" menu is displayed. 2. "Display Owner's Manual" 3. Select the desired page in the Owner's Manual. 4. Press the button again to return to the function displayed last. 5. Press the button to return to the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last. To switch back and forth repeatedly between the function displayed last and the page of the Owner's Manual displayed last, repeat steps 4 and 5. This opens a new panel every time. 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 At a glance 31 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with information that will give you complete control of your vehicle. All features and accessories that are useful for driving and your safety, comfort and convenience are described here. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing Vehicle equipment Integrated key All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Remote control/key Press the button on the back of the remote control, arrow 1, and pull out the key, arrow 2. Buttons on the remote control The integrated key fits the following locks: ▷ Driver's door. ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side. Replacing the battery 1 Unlocking 2 Locking 3 Opening the tailgate 4 Panic mode General information The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ trols with keys. 1. Take the integrated key out of the remote control. 2. Push in the catch with the key, arrow 1. Every remote control contains a replaceable battery. 3. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. The settings called up and implemented when the car is unlocked depend on which remote control is used to unlock the car. Personal Pro‐ file, refer to page 35. 4. Insert a battery of the same type with the positive side facing upwards. Information on the required maintenance is stored in the remote control as well. Service data in the remote control, refer to page 229 34 5. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing Controls New remote controls Personal Profile New remote controls are available from the service center. The concept Loss of the remote controls You can set several of your vehicle's functions to suit your personal needs and preferences. Lost remote controls can be blocked by your service center. ▷ The settings are automatically saved in the profile currently activated. Emergency detection of remote control ▷ The remote control used is detected when the vehicle is unlocked and the stored pro‐ file is called up. It is possible to switch on the ignition or start the engine in situations such as the following: ▷ Interference of radio transmission to re‐ mote control by external sources. ▷ Discharged battery in the remote control. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by mo‐ bile devices in close proximity to the re‐ mote control. ▷ Interference of radio transmission by charger while charging items such as mo‐ bile devices in the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed if an at‐ tempt is made to switch on the ignition or start the engine. Starting the engine with emergency detection of the remote control ▷ Your personal settings will be recognized and called up again even if the vehicle has been used in the meantime by someone else with another remote control. The individual settings are stored for three Personal Profiles and one guest profile. Transmitting the settings Your personal settings can be taken with you to another vehicle equipped with the Personal Profile function. Additional information is avail‐ able from the service center. Transmission takes place via: ▷ The USB interface in the center armrest onto a USB device. ▷ BMW Online. Profile management Opening the profiles A different profile can be called up than the one associated with the remote control cur‐ rently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Profiles" If a corresponding Check Control message ap‐ pears, hold the remote control vertically against the marked area on the steering col‐ umn and press the Start/Stop button within 10 seconds while pressing the brake. 3. Select a profile. Called up profile is assigned to the remote control being used at the time. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 35 Controls Opening and closing Renaming profiles Using the guest profile 1. "Settings" The guest profile can be used to make individ‐ ual settings without affecting the three Per‐ sonal Profiles. 2. "Profiles" The current profile is selected. 4. "Rename current profile" This can be useful for drivers who are using the vehicle temporarily and do not have their own profile. Resetting profiles 1. "Settings" The settings of the active profile are reset to their default values. 2. "Profiles" 1. "Settings" 3. Open "Guest". 2. "Profiles" 4. Create the settings. 3. Open "Options". The current profile is selected. 3. Open "Options". 4. "Reset current profile" Importing profiles The current profile is selected. Note: the guest profile cannot be renamed. Display profile list during start The profile list can be displayed during each start for selecting the desired profile. Existing settings and contacts are overwritten with the imported profile. 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 3. Open "Options". 2. "Profiles" 4. "Display user list at startup" 3. "Import profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" USB interface, refer to page 179: "USB device" 2. "Profiles" Personal Profile settings The following functions and settings can be stored in a profile. ▷ Collision warning: warning time. Exporting profiles ▷ Exterior mirror position. Most settings of the active profile and the saved contacts can be exported. ▷ CD/Multimedia: audio source listened to last. This can be helpful for securing and retrieving personal settings, before delivering the vehicle to a workshop for example. ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle: settings. 1. "Settings" ▷ Driver's seat position: automatic retrieval after unlocking. ▷ Programmable memory buttons: assign‐ ment. 2. "Profiles" 3. "Export profile" 4. BMW Online: "BMW Online" USB interface, refer to page 179: "USB device" 36 ▷ Driving Dynamics Control: sport program. ▷ Head-up Display: selection, brightness, position and rotation of the display. ▷ Headlamp courtesy delay feature: time set‐ ting. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing ▷ Tone: tone settings. ▷ Automatic climate control: settings. ▷ Steering wheel position. Controls The following takes place simultaneously when locking/unlocking the vehicle via the re‐ mote control: ▷ Intelligent Safety: individual settings. ▷ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the theft protection is activated/deacti‐ vated. Theft protection prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock but‐ tons or the door opener. ▷ Park Distance Control PDC: adjusting the signal tone volume. ▷ The welcome lamps, interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on and off. ▷ Radio: stored stations, station listened to last, special settings. ▷ The alarm system, refer to page 45, is armed or disarmed. ▷ Rearview camera: selection of functions and type of display. Operating from the inside ▷ Navigation: map views, route criteria, voice output on/off. ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian detection. ▷ Side View: selection of the display type. ▷ Language on the Control Display. ▷ Lane departure warning: last setting, on/ off. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection: last setting, on/off. ▷ Daytime running lights: current setting. ▷ Triple turn signal activation. ▷ Locking the vehicle: after a brief period or after starting to drive. ▷ Central locking system ▷ The concept If the vehicle has been locked from inside, the fuel filler flap remains unlocked. The central locking system becomes active when the driver's door is closed. The system simultaneously engages and re‐ leases the locks on the following: ▷ Doors. Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked. Press the button. Vehicle is locked. If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The hazard warning system and interior lamps come on. ▷ Tailgate. ▷ Fuel filler flap. Operating from the outside ▷ Via the remote control. ▷ Via the door handles. ▷ Via the button on the tailgate. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 37 Controls Opening and closing Opening and closing: from the outside Using the remote control General information Take the remote control with you People or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from the in‐ side. Always take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.◀ Switching on interior lamps and courtesy lamps Press the button on the remote control with the vehicle locked. If the button is pressed again within 10 sec‐ onds of when the vehicle was locked Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor of the antitheft warning system, refer to page 46, are switched off. After locking, wait 10 seconds before interior lamps and courtesy lamps are switched on. Panic mode Unlocking Press the button on the remote con‐ trol. The vehicle is unlocked. Welcome lamps, interior lamp and courtesy lamps are switched on. You can set how the vehicle is to be unlocked. Create the settings, refer to page 44. Convenient opening The remote control can be used to simultane‐ ously open the windows and the glass sunroof. Press and hold the button on the re‐ mote control. The windows and the glass sunroof open. Releasing the button stops the motion. Locking Press the button on the remote control. Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ 38 You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Opening the tailgate Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for approx. 1 second and release. The tailgate opens automatically, regardless of whether it was previously locked or unlocked. The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that adequate clearance is available before opening. This button can also be used to unlock the doors. The button assignment on the remote control can be set variously depending on how the vehicle is equipped and according to the country-specific variant. In some vehicle equipment variants, the tail‐ gate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle has been unlocked. Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is pushed closed. Provide edge protection Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ tion.◀ Malfunction If the vehicle can no longer be locked or un‐ locked with the remote control, the battery may be discharged or there may be interfer‐ ence from external sources such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. Controls Using the door lock General information Locking from the outside Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if there are people in it, as the vehicle cannot be unlocked from inside without special knowl‐ edge.◀ The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control. If this occurs, lock or unlock the driver's door at the door lock using the integrated key. Only the driver's door is unlocked or locked via the door lock. For US owners only Locking the doors and tailgate at once The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: To lock all doors and the tailgate at once: FCC ID: 1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle us‐ ing the button for the central locking sys‐ tem in the interior. 2. Unlock and open the driver's or front pas‐ senger door. ▷ LX8766S. ▷ LX8766E. 3. Lock the vehicle. ▷ LX8CAS. ▷ Lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or ▷ LX8CAS2. ▷ MYTCAS4. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ Press down the lock button of the front passenger door and close the door from the outside. The fuel filler flap can only be locked using the remote control. ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 39 Controls Opening and closing Manual operation Unlocking and opening If an electrical malfunction occurs, lock or un‐ lock the vehicle using the integrated key via the door lock on the driver's door. ▷ Either unlock the doors together using the button for the central locking system and then pull the door handle above the arm‐ rest or 1. Integrated key in opening, arrow, press and remove cover. ▷ Pull the door opener on the door to be opened. The other doors remain locked. To open the rear doors individually, pull the door opener twice: the first time unlocks them, the second time opens them. Doors Automatic Soft Closing 2. Unlock or lock the driver's door using the integrated key in the door lock, or To close the doors, push lightly. It is closed automatically. Danger of pinching Opening and closing: from the inside Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Locking and unlocking Top tailgate Automatic tailgate operation Adjusting the opening height You can set how far the tailgate should open. Adjusting the opening height ▷ Press the button. Vehicle is locked. ▷ Press the button. The vehicle is unlocked. Pressing the buttons locks and unlocks the doors and the tailgate when the front doors are closed, but they are not secured against theft. When adjusting the opening height, en‐ sure that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm above the tailgate. Otherwise, the ceiling may not be high enough for the open tailgate if the load situation changes.◀ 1. "Settings" 2. "Tailgate" 3. Turn the controller until the desired open‐ ing height is selected. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing Opening Controls Provide edge protection The tailgate opens until it reaches the set height. Note the opening height of the tailgate The tailgate pivots back and up when it opens. Ensure that there is sufficient clearance when the tailgate opens; otherwise, damage may result. Adjust the opening height of the tailgate ac‐ cording to the given situation.◀ Sharp or angular objects can hit the rear window while driving and damage the heating wires of the rear window. Provide edge protec‐ tion.◀ Closing The lower tailgate must be closed; otherwise, a Check Control message is output. The floor panel in the cargo area must be folded down; otherwise, the tailgate cannot be closed. Without Comfort Access: ▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐ gate. ▷ Press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second. This button can also be used to unlock the doors. The button assignment on the re‐ mote control can be set variously depend‐ ing on how the vehicle is equipped and ac‐ cording to the country-specific variant. ▷ ▷ Press the button on the inside of the tail‐ gate. The tailgate closes automatically. Pressing again stops the motion. With Comfort Access: Press the button in the driver's door. The tailgate is opened if the vehicle is sta‐ tionary, provided that the tailgate has not been locked. Pressing the button again stops the motion. The opening process is interrupted as well: ▷ When starting the engine. ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ By pressing the button in the driver's door. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the tailgate. ▷ Press the button, arrow 1, on the inside of the tailgate. The tailgate closes automatically. Pressing again stops the motion. ▷ Press the button, arrow 2. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 41 Controls Opening and closing Tailgate closes automatically and the vehi‐ cle is locked. mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, man‐ ually unlock and the tailgate and move it slowly and smoothly. Do not operate the tailgate manually if it is blocked ▷ Press the button on the exterior of the tail‐ gate. If the tailgate is blocked, do not operate it man‐ ually as the tailgate may otherwise become damaged and injury may result. Contact your service center.◀ Pressing again stops the motion. ▷ Press and hold the button on the remote control in the area close to the vehicle. An acoustic signal sounds, releasing the button stops the motion. ▷ Pull and hold the button in the driver door. The remote control must be located in the interior for this func‐ tion. An acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate closes. The closing operation is interrupted: ▷ When starting the engine. ▷ The vehicle starts off with jerks. Keep the closing path clear Make sure that the closing path of the tailgate is clear; otherwise, injuries may re‐ sult.◀ Monitor the closing process 1. Fold the rear seat backrest forward. 2. In the lower tailgate, loosen and remove the cover using the onboard tool kit or a suitable object. 3. Pull the plastic hose in the direction of the interior. The tailgate is unlocked. 4. Open the top tailgate, and press the plastic hose back in. 5. Insert and close the cover. The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is closed. Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀ Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ 42 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing Controls Lower tailgate ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. Opening ▷ The engine can only be started if the re‐ mote control is in the vehicle. Comparison with ordinary remote control The functions can be controlled by pressing the buttons of the remote control or Comfort Access. Unlocking Pull the lever and swing down the tailgate. The open tailgate can be loaded with up to 550 lbs/250 kg. Closing Swing up the tailgate, and press it closed. Comfort Access The concept The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐ ing the remote control. All you need to do is to have the remote con‐ trol with you, e.g., in your jacket pocket. Fully grasp a door handle, arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the on the remote control. button Locking The vehicle automatically detects the remote control when it is nearby or in the passenger compartment. Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking/locking of the vehicle. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Unlocking of the tailgate separately. ▷ Start the engine. Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second. Functional requirements This corresponds to pressing the on the remote control. ▷ There are no external sources of interfer‐ ence nearby. To save battery power, ensure that the ignition and all electronic systems and/or power con‐ button ▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control must be located outside of the vehicle. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 43 Controls Opening and closing sumers are switched off before locking the ve‐ hicle. 3. Select symbol or "Unlock button:" 4. Select the desired function: ▷ "Driver's door only" Convenient closing Press the area on the door handle, arrow 2, with the finger and hold it down. In addition to locking, the windows and the glass sunroof are closed. Monitor the closing process Monitor the closing process to ensure that no one becomes trapped.◀ Unlocking the tailgate separately Press the button on the exterior of the tailgate. This corresponds to pressing the ton on the remote control. but‐ Do not place the remote control in the cargo area Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ locks the entire vehicle. ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped or the country-specific variant, you can set whether the doors are also unlocked with the button on the remote control. Confirmation signals from the vehicle The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" Take the remote control with you and do not leave it in the cargo area; otherwise, the re‐ mote control is locked inside the vehicle when the tailgate is closed.◀ 3. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ mation signals. Malfunction Automatic locking Comfort Access may not function properly if it experiences interference from external sour‐ ces such as mobile phones, metal objects, overhead power lines, transmission towers, etc. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. In this case, open or close the vehicle using the buttons on the remote control or use the integrated key in the door lock. Adjusting ▷ "Acoustic sig. lock/unlock" ▷ "Flash when lock/unlock" 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. Select the desired function: ▷ "Lock if no door is opened" The vehicle locks automatically after a short period of time if a door is not opened. ▷ "Lock after start driving" Unlocking The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. The vehicle locks automatically after you drive away. 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 44 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing Controls Retrieving the seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings Arming and disarming the alarm system The driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions selected last are stored for the currently used remote control. General information When the vehicle is unlocked, these positions are automatically retrieved if this function was activated. Pinch hazard when moving back the seat If this function is used, first make sure that the footwell behind the driver's seat is empty. Otherwise, people can be injured or ob‐ jects damaged when the seat is moved back.◀ The adjustment procedure is interrupted: ▷ When a seat position switch is pressed. ▷ When a button of the seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory is pressed briefly. Activating the setting 1. "Settings" 2. "Doors/key" 3. "Last seat position autom." When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or via the Comfort Ac‐ cess at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time. Door lock and armed alarm system The alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle is unlocked via the door lock. In order to terminate this alarm, unlock vehicle with the remote control or switch on the igni‐ tion, if necessary, by emergency detection of the remote control. Tailgate and armed alarm system The tailgate can be opened even when the alarm system is armed. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for approx. 1 second. After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and monitored again if the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Alarm system The concept The vehicle alarm system responds to: ▷ Opening of a door, the hood or the tailgate. ▷ Movements in the vehicle. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e.g., during at‐ tempts to steal a wheel or when towing the car. ▷ Interruptions in battery voltage. The alarm system briefly indicates tampering: ▷ By sounding an acoustic alarm. In some vehicle equipment variants, the tail‐ gate can only be opened using the remote control if the vehicle was unlocked first. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find yourself in a dangerous situation. Press the button on the remote con‐ trol for at least 3 seconds. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Switching off the alarm ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐ tem. To terminate the alarm: ▷ By flashing the high beams. ▷ Unlock the vehicle using the remote con‐ trol. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 45 Controls Opening and closing ▷ With Comfort Access: If you are carrying the remote control with you, grasp the driver side or front passenger side door handle completely. Indicator lamp on the interior rearview mirror Interior motion sensor The windows and glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off together, such as in the following situations: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on car-carrying trains, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ When animals are to remain in the vehicle. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes briefly every 2 seconds: The system is armed. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after locking: The doors, hood or tailgate is not closed properly, but the rest of the vehicle is se‐ cured. After 10 seconds, the indicator lamp flashes continuously. Interior motion sen‐ sor and tilt alarm sensor are not active. ▷ The indicator lamp goes out after unlock‐ ing: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the engine ignition is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. Tilt alarm sensor Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the remote control button again within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. The indicator lamp lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐ sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Power windows General information Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot operate the power windows and in‐ jure themselves.◀ The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the car is towed. 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing Controls The window reopens slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ tection Even with the pinch protection system, check that the window's closing path is clear; other‐ wise, the closing action may not stop in certain situations, e.g., if thin objects are present.◀ No window accessories Opening ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is held. ▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient opening, refer to page 38, via the remote control. Closing Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. The window closes while the switch is held. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance point. The window closes automatically. Pressing the switch stops the motion. Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is inter‐ rupted. Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows; otherwise, the pinch protection system will be impaired.◀ Closing without the pinch protection system Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the window is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ For example, if there is an external danger or if ice on the windows prevents a window from closing normally, proceed as follows: 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. The pinch protection is limited and the window reopens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. The window closes without pinch protec‐ tion. Safety switch The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for example, from opening and closing the rear windows using the switches in the rear. Switching on and off Press the button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 47 Controls Opening and closing The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. Safety switch for rear operation Press the safety switch when transport‐ ing children in the rear; otherwise, injury may result if the windows are closed without super‐ vision.◀ Roller sunblinds Roller sunblinds for the rear side windows Pull out the roller sunblind at the loop and hook it onto the bracket. Do not open the window while the roller sunblind is raised. Do not open the window while the roller sun‐ blind is raised; otherwise, there is a risk of damage at high speeds that may result in per‐ sonal injury.◀ Panoramic-glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the sliding visor can be operated together or separately, using the same switch. The glass sunroof is operational when the igni‐ tion is switched on. Tilting the glass sunroof Push switch upward briefly. ▷ The closed roof is tilted and the sliding visor opens slightly. ▷ The opened roof closes until it is in its tilted position. The sliding visor stays com‐ pletely open. Opening/closing the sliding visor ▷ Press the switch in the de‐ sired direction to the resist‐ ance point and hold it there. The sliding visor moves while the switch is being held. ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction past the resistance point. The sliding visor moves automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the mo‐ tion. Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Opening/closing the glass sunroof When the sliding visor is open, proceed as de‐ scribed under Sliding visor. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot operate the roof and injure them‐ selves.◀ 48 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Opening and closing Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sliding visor together Briefly press the switch twice in succession in the desired direc‐ tion past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sliding vi‐ sor move together. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Convenient operation, refer to page 38, via the remote control. Convenient closing, refer to page 44, with Comfort Access. Controls Pinch protection is limited and the roof re‐ opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value. 2. Press the switch forward again beyond the resistance point and hold until the roof closes without pinch protection. Make sure that the closing area is clear. Closing from the raised position without pinch protection If there is an external danger, push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold it. The roof closes without pinch protection. Comfort position Initializing after a power failure Stops the roof in the comfort position if the roof is not fully open. This reduces wind noise in the passenger compartment. After a power failure during the opening or closing process, the roof can only be operated to a limited extent. If desired, continue the movement by pressing the switch. Initializing the system Pinch protection system The system can be initialized when the vehicle is stationary and the engine is running. If the closing force when closing the glass sun‐ roof exceeds a certain value, the closing move‐ ment is stopped, beginning at approximately the middle of the opening in the roof, or from the tilted position during closing. The glass sunroof opens again slightly. Danger of pinching even with pinch pro‐ tection Despite the pinch protection system, check that the roof's closing path is clear; otherwise, the closing action may not be interrupted in certain extreme situations, such as when thin objects are present.◀ Closing from the open position without pinch protection During the initialization, the roof closes without pinch protection. Keep the closing path clear Monitor the closing process and make sure that the closing path of the glass sunroof is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is com‐ plete: ▷ Initialization begins within 15 seconds and is com‐ pleted when the sunroof and sliding visor are completely closed. ▷ The roof closes without pinch protection. For example, if there is an external danger, pro‐ ceed as follows: 1. Press the switch forward beyond the re‐ sistance point and hold. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 49 Controls Adjusting Adjusting Vehicle equipment Semi-electrically adjustable seats All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. At a glance Sitting safely The ideal seating position can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. 1 Forward/backward The seating position plays an important role in an accident in combination with: 2 Height, tilt 3 Backrest 4 Lumbar support ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 55. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 57. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 104. Tilt Front seats General information Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the driver's seat while driv‐ ing, or the seat could respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident.◀ Do not incline the backrest too far to the rear Move the control in the desired direction until the desired tilt is set. After releasing the con‐ trol, apply your weight to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat engages properly. Also on the front passenger side, do not incline the backrest on the front passenger side too far to the rear during driving, or there is a risk of slipping under the safety belt in the event of an accident. This would eliminate the protection normally provided by the belt.◀ 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Adjusting Forward/backward Controls Electrically adjustable seats At a glance Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired direction. After releasing the control, move the seat for‐ ward or back slightly to make sure it engages properly. Height 1 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory 2 Shoulder support 3 Backrest width 4 Lumbar support 5 Backrest 6 Forward/back, height, tilt 7 Thigh support Note Move the button in the required direction. The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the remote control currently in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the remote control, the position is automatically retrieved if the Function, refer to page 45, for this is activated. Adjustments in detail Backrest 1. Forward/backward Move the button in the required direction. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 51 Controls 2. Height Adjusting Thigh support Multifunctional seat 3. Seat tilt Adjust the position using the lever. Sport seat 4. Backrest tilt Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust the thigh support. Lumbar support The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in such a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright posture. ▷ Press the front/rear section of the switch. The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐ tion of the switch. The curvature is shifted up/ down. 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Adjusting Backrest width Controls Switching off Change the width of the back‐ rest using the side wings to ad‐ just the lateral support. Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. Temperature distribution The heating action in the seat cushion and backrest can be distributed in different ways. Shoulder support 1. "Climate" 2. "Front seat heating" 3. Select the required seat. 4. Turn the controller to set the temperature distribution. Active seat ventilation, front Also supports the back in the shoulder area: ▷ Results in a relaxed seating position. ▷ Reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. The seat cushion and backrest surfaces are cooled by means of integrated fans. The ventilation cools the seat, e. g., if the vehi‐ cle interior is overheated or for continuous cooling at high temperatures. Front seat heating Switching on Switching on Press the button once for each tem‐ perature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐ cally with the temperature selected last. Press the button once for each venti‐ lation level. The highest level is active when three LEDs are lit. After a short time, the system automatically moves down one level in order to prevent ex‐ cessive cooling. Switching off Press the button longer. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 53 Controls Adjusting The LEDs go out. 2. Release lever and move seat slightly for‐ ward or back to get it to latch in place. Rear seats Backrest tilt Second row of seats The backrest tilt can be adjusted to six set‐ tings. Hints Center armrest When folding down the center armrest, ensure that the area below the center head re‐ straint is clear. Otherwise, injury may result.◀ Do not adjust the seat while driving Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving, otherwise, the restraining effect of the seat can be limited in an accident.◀ Keep the floor area under the second row of seats clear When you fold back the second row of seats, make sure that the floor area under the second row of seats is clear. Otherwise, persons who are located in the third row of seats could be injured or objects could be damaged.◀ Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the backrest or lift it off, as necessary. Access to the third row of seats 1. Make sure that the middle section is folded up. When the middle section is folded down, comfortable entry is not possible. Fold back and lock the second row of seats Before starting off, fold back and lock the sec‐ ond row of seats; otherwise, people can be in‐ jured or objects damaged.◀ Forward/backward 2. Pull the lever and fold the seat forward. The recessed grip on the inside trim of the door pillar makes getting into the vehicle eas‐ ier. If the second row of seats is not locked, a warning symbol is displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. Pull the lever, arrow 1, and slide the seat in the desired direction. 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Adjusting Rear seat heating Controls Before folding up the backrest, remove the cargo cover, refer to page 180. If necessary, slide the second row of seats forward a little. 1. Pull the lever, arrow, to unlock the back‐ rest. Switching on Press the button once for each tem‐ perature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the drive is continued within approx. 15 mi‐ nutes, the seat heating is activated automati‐ cally with the temperature selected last. 2. Fold up and latch the backrest. 3. Slide headrests into the highest position. Folding the backrest down 1. Moving the headrest down. 2. Pull the lever, arrows, to unlock the back‐ rest. Switching off Press the button longer. The LEDs go out. Third row of seats General information The third row of seats is divided and offers space for two people. Folding up the backrest Ensure that the lock is securely engaged Make sure that the lock engages cor‐ rectly. If it is not properly engaged, transported cargo could enter the passenger compartment even during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occupants.◀ 3. Fold the backrest down. Safety belts Seats with safety belt The vehicle has five or seven seating positions, each of which is equipped with a safety belt. Hints Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by all occupants before driving away. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 55 Controls Adjusting To protect the occupants, the belt locking trig‐ gers early. Slowly guide the belt out of the holder when applying it. Buckling the belt Although airbags enhance safety by providing added protection, they are not a substitute for safety belts. ▷ The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. ▷ The two outer safety belt buckles, integrated into the 2nd row of seats, are for passengers sitting on the left and right. Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle. ▷ The center belt buckle of the 2nd row of seats is solely intended for the center pas‐ senger. To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an adjustable slider is available on the belt to help position the buckle when not in use. ▷ The safety belt buckles, integrated into the 3rd row of seats, are for passengers sitting on the left and right. Tensioning the safety belt automatically One person per safety belt Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow infants or small children to ride on a passenger's lap.◀ Unbuckling the belt 1. Hold the belt firmly. Putting on the belt Lay the belt, without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub on sharp edges, be routed over breakable objects, or be pinched.◀ Reduction of restraining effect Avoid wearing bulky clothing, and pull the shoulder belt periodically to readjust the tension. Make sure that the belt is not jammed; otherwise, the belt can be damaged and the restraining effect reduced.◀ 56 When the belt is closed, it is automatically tightened once after the release. 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. 3. Guide the belt back into its reel. Safety belt reminder for driver's and passenger's seat The indicator lamp lights up and a sig‐ nal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder is active at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. It can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Damage to safety belts In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Have the safety belts, including the safety belt tensioners, replaced and have the belt anchors checked. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Adjusting Checking and replacing safety belts Have the work performed only by your service center; otherwise, it cannot be ensured that this safety feature will function properly.◀ Controls Have the active headrest checked and if nec‐ essary replaced. Adjusting the height: manual head restraints Front head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. ▷ To raise: pull. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. Adjusting the height: electrical head restraints Distance Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a cer‐ tain severity, the active head restraint automat‐ ically reduces the distance from the head. Reduced protective function Adjusting electrically. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, e.g., clothes hangers, on the head restraints. ▷ Only attach accessories approved by BMW to the seat or head restraint. Otherwise, the protective function of the active head restraint will be impaired and the per‐ sonal safety of the occupants will be endan‐ gered.◀ In the case of strain caused by accidents or damage: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 57 Controls Adjusting Distance to back of head: manual head restraints Adjusting the head restraint Correctly adjust the head restraints of all occupied seats; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in an accident.◀ Height Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approximately at ear level. Adjusting the height ▷ Forward: by pulling ▷ Back: press the button and push the head restraint toward the rear. Distance to back of head: electrical head restraints The head restraint is automatically reposi‐ tioned when the shoulder support is adjusted. Adjusting the side extensions ▷ To raise: pull. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. The center head restraint cannot be adjusted in elevation. Removing Only remove the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the seat in question. Fold forward for increased lateral support in the resting position. Removing The head restraints cannot be removed. Rear head restraints Correctly adjusted head restraint A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in the event of an accident. 58 1. Pull the head restraint upward as far as possible. 2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head restraint out completely. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Adjusting Before transporting passengers Reinstall the head restraint before trans‐ porting anyone in the seat; otherwise, the pro‐ tective function of the head restraint is unavail‐ able.◀ 3. Controls Press the button. The LED in the button lights up. 4. Press the desired button 1 or 2. The LED goes out. If the M button is pressed accidentally: Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory Press the button again. The LED goes out. Calling up settings Hints Do not retrieve the memory while driving Do not retrieve the memory setting while driving, as an unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel could result in an acci‐ dent.◀ Keep the movement area unobstructed When changing the seat position, keep the seat's area of movement unobstructed; otherwise, people can be injured or objects damaged.◀ General information Comfort function 1. Open the driver's door. 2. Switch off the ignition. 3. Briefly press the desired button 1 or 2. The corresponding seat position is performed automatically. The procedure stops when a switch for adjust‐ ing the seat or one of the buttons is pressed. Safety mode 1. Close the driver's door or switch on the ig‐ nition. 2. Press and hold the desired button 1 or 2 until the adjustment procedure is com‐ pleted. Calling up of a seat position deactivated After a brief period, the calling up of stored seat positions is deactivated to save battery power. Two different driver's seat, exterior mirror, and steering wheel positions can be stored and re‐ trieved for each remote control. The adjust‐ ment of the lumbar support is not stored. To reactivate calling up of a seat position: ▷ Open or close the door or tailgate. ▷ Press a button on the remote control. ▷ Press the Start/Stop button. Storing 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Set the desired position. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 59 Controls Adjusting Mirrors Saving positions Exterior mirrors Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory, refer to page 59. At a glance Adjusting manually If an electrical malfunction occurs, for example, press the edges of the mirror glass. Automatic Curb Monitor The concept 1 Adjusting 2 Left/right, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Fold in and out When the reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass tilts downward slightly on the front pas‐ senger side. This improves your view of the curb and other low-lying obstacles when park‐ ing, for example. Activating General information 1. The mirror on the passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. 2. Engage transmission position R. Estimating distances correctly Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance to the traffic behind you based on what you see in the mirror, as this will increase your risk of an accident.◀ Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the mirror setting is stored for the remote control in use. When the vehicle is unlocked via the re‐ mote control, the position is automatically re‐ trieved if the setting for this function is active. Slide the mirror changeover switch to the driver's side mirror position. Deactivating Slide the mirror changeover switch to the pas‐ senger side mirror position. Fold in and out Press the button. Possible up to approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. For example, this is advantageous ▷ In car washes. ▷ In narrow streets. Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the mirror changeover switch. Adjusting electrically ▷ For folding back mirrors that were folded away manually. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. The setting corresponds to the direc‐ tion in which the button is pressed. 60 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Adjusting Fold in the mirror in a car wash Before washing the car in an automatic car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors by hand or with the button; otherwise, the mirrors could be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle.◀ Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated whenever the engine is running. Controls Steering wheel General information Do not adjust while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving; otherwise, an unexpected movement could result in an accident.◀ Manual steering wheel adjustment Automatic dimming feature Both exterior mirrors are automatically dim‐ med. Photocells are used for control in the In‐ terior rear view mirror, refer to page 61. Interior rearview mirror, automatic dimming feature The concept 1. Fold the lever down. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred height and angle to suit your seating posi‐ tion. 3. Fold the lever back. Power steering wheel adjustment Photocells are used for control: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the back of the mirror. Functional requirement For proper operation: ▷ Keep the photocells clean. The steering wheel can be adjusted in four di‐ rections. ▷ Do not cover the area between the inside rearview mirror and the windshield. Storing the position Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory, refer to page 59. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 61 Controls Adjusting Steering wheel heating Switching on/off Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Transporting children safely Controls Transporting children safely Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. The right place for children Note Children in the vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger them‐ selves and other persons, e.g., by opening the doors.◀ Children should always be in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back seat. Transporting children in the rear Only transport children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm in the rear in child restraint fixing systems pro‐ vided in accordance with the age, weight and size of the child; otherwise, there is an in‐ creased risk of injury in an accident. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint fixing system can no longer be used, due to their age, weight and size.◀ Children on the front passenger seat Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐ straint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deacti‐ vated. Automatic deactivation of front passen‐ ger airbags, refer to page 106. Note Deactivated front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ straint fixing system.◀ Installing child restraint fixing systems Before mounting Before mounting child restraint fixing systems, ensure that the rear seat backrests are locked. Third row of seats Before installing a child restraint system on the third row of seats, note the following: ▷ Roll up the cargo cover, partition net and remove the case ▷ Bring seats and backrests of the second row of seats into the forwardmost position ▷ Raise the headrests of the third row of seats into the highest position. Do not change the settings that have been made after this. Hints Manufacturer's information for child re‐ straint fixing systems To select, mount and use child restraint fixing systems, observe the information provided by the system manufacturer; otherwise, the pro‐ tective effect can be impaired.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 63 Controls Transporting children safely Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before installation of child restraint sys‐ tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against the backrest and securely latch all backrests. Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐ ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐ cause of unexpected movement of the rear seat backrest.◀ Lock seats of the second row of seats When equipped with a third row of seats: when a child restraint system is installed on the second row of seats, make sure that this seat is correctly locked; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury for the child in the event of an accident.◀ Only approved child restraint systems on the third row of seats On the third row of seats install only approved child restraint systems; otherwise the protec‐ tive effect is not guaranteed and there is an in‐ creased risk of injury for the child in the event of an accident.◀ Seat position and height Before installing a child restraint fixing system, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust its height to the highest position to obtain the best possible position for the belt and to offer optimal protection in the event of an accident. Do not change the seat position and height af‐ ter this. Backrest width Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front pas‐ senger seat, open the backrest width com‐ pletely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. Backrest width for the child seat Before installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, the back‐ rest width must be opened completely. Do not change the adjustment after this; otherwise, the stability of the child seat will be reduced.◀ Child seat security On the front passenger seat Deactivating airbags After installing a child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas‐ senger side are deactivated. Deactivate the front passenger airbags auto‐ matically, refer to page 106. Deactivating the front passenger airbags If a child restraint fixing system is used in the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbags must be deactivated; otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child when the airbags are triggered, even with a child re‐ straint fixing system.◀ 64 The rear safety belts and the front passenger safety belt can be locked against pulling out for mounting the child restraint fixing systems. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt webbing completely. 2. Secure the child restraint fixing system with the belt. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Transporting children safely 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull it taut against the child restraint fixing system. The safety belt is locked. Controls Position Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint fixing system. 3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com‐ pletely. LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for CHil‐ dren. Note Manufacturer's information for LATCH child restraint fixing systems To mount and use the LATCH child restraint fixing systems, observe the operating and safety information from the system manufac‐ turer; otherwise, the level of protection may be reduced.◀ Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors are lo‐ cated in the gap between the seat and back‐ rest. Mounting ISOFIX child restraint fixing systems 1. Mount the child restraint fixing system; re‐ fer to the user's manual of the system. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly connected. Child restraint fixing system with a tether strap Mounting points Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. Correctly engage the lower LATCH an‐ chors Make sure that the lower LATCH anchors have properly engaged and that the child restraint fixing system is resting snugly against the backrest; otherwise, the degree of protection offered may be reduced.◀ There are three mounting points for the upper retaining strap of LATCH child restraint fixing systems. Before mounting the LATCH child restraint fix‐ ing system, pull the belt away from the child restraint fixing system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 65 Controls Transporting children safely Note 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. Mounting eyes Only use the mounting eyes for the up‐ per retaining strap to secure child restraint fix‐ ing systems; otherwise, the mounting eyes could be damaged.◀ Retaining strap guide Retaining strap 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed. Locking the doors and windows Rear doors Make sure that the upper retaining strap is not routed over the head restraints or sharp edges and is free of twisting on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt can‐ not properly secure the child restraint fixing system in an accident.◀ Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only. Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door if children are being transported in the 1 Direction of travel 2 Head restraint. 3 Hook for upper retaining strap 4 Mounting point/eye 5 Seat backrest 6 Upper retaining strap rear. This locks various functions so that they can‐ not be operated from the rear: safety switch, refer to page 47. Attaching the upper retaining strap to the mounting point 1. Raise the head restraint if necessary. 2. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports of the head restraint. 3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between the backrest and the cargo cover. 4. Attach the hooks of the retaining strap to the mounting eyes. 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Controls Driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Start/Stop button The concept Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the ignition on or off and starts the engine. The engine starts if the brake pedal is pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. Ignition on Press the Start/Stop button, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All vehicle systems are ready for operation. Most of the indicator and warning lamps in the instrument cluster light up for varying lengths of time. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. Note If the engine is switched off and the ignition is switched on, the system automatically switches to the radio ready state when the door is opened if the lights are switched off or the daytime running lights are switched on. Ignition off Press the Start/Stop button again, and do not press on the brake pedal at the same time. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster go out. To save battery power when the engine is off, switch off the ignition and any unnecessary electronic systems/power consumers. Transmission position P with the ignition off When ignition is switched off, selector lever position P is engaged automatically. When in an automatic car wash, for example, ensure that the ignition is not switched off acciden‐ tally.◀ The ignition automatically cuts off while the vehicle is stationary and the engine is stopped: ▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the low beams are activated. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. This function is only available when the low beams are switched off. ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the low beams are switched off. ▷ While the driver's seat belt is unbuckled, if the driver's door is open and the low beams are switched off. When the ignition is switched off, by opening or closing the driver's door or unbuckling the driver's seat belt, the radio ready state remains active. Radio ready state Activate radio ready state: ▷ When the engine is running: press the Start/Stop button. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 67 Controls Driving Some electronic systems/power consumers remain ready for operation. The radio ready state switches off automati‐ cally: ▷ After approx. 8 minutes. ▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐ tral locking system. ▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged completely, so that the engine can still be started. Starting the engine Hints Diesel engine If the engine is cold and temperatures are be‐ low approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃, the start process may be delayed somewhat due to automatic pre‐ heating. A Check Control message is displayed. Automatic transmission Starting the engine 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a certain time and is stopped as soon as the en‐ gine starts. Enclosed areas Do not let the engine run in enclosed areas, since breathing in exhaust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas.◀ Unattended vehicle Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running; doing so poses a risk of danger. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, set the parking brake and place the trans‐ mission in selector lever position P or neutral to prevent the vehicle from moving.◀ Repeated starting in quick succession Avoid repeated unsuccessful attempts to start the vehicle or starting the vehicle several times in quick succession. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned, posing a risk of overheating and damage to the cata‐ lytic converter.◀ Engine stop Hints Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot start the engine.◀ Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ Before driving into a car wash In order for the vehicle to be able to roll into a car wash, pay attention to the information re‐ garding Washing in automatic car washes, re‐ fer to page 244. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. 68 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Automatic transmission Switching off the engine 1. Engage transmission position P with the vehicle stopped. Controls The air volume of the air conditioner is reduced when the engine is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster The display indicates that the automatic engine start-stop function is ready for an auto‐ matic engine start. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The radio ready state is switched on. 3. Set the parking brake. The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been satis‐ fied. Automatic Engine Start/Stop Function The concept Note The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, e.g., in traffic congestion or at traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on. The engine starts again automatically for driving off. The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: ▷ External temperature too low. Certain vehicle components may experience additional wear as a result of this system. ▷ The passenger compartment has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level. Automatic mode ▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐ ature. The Auto Start/Stop function is operational af‐ ter each engine start. This function is activated at speeds faster than about 3 mph, approx. 5 km/h. ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steering wheel is being turned. ▷ After driving in reverse. Engine stop ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. The engine is switched off automatically dur‐ ing a stop under the following conditions: ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. Automatic transmission: ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ tion D. ▷ The brake pedal remains pressed while the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold. ▷ The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. ▷ The engine compartment lid is unlocked. ▷ HDC Hill Descent Control is activated. ▷ The parking assistant is activated. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ The transmission selector lever is in posi‐ tion N or M/S. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 69 Controls Driving Starting the engine The engine starts automatically under the fol‐ lowing conditions: ▷ Automatic transmission: By releasing the brake pedal. When Automatic Hold is activated: press the accelerator. Preventing an automatic engine stop with automatic transmission The concept To make it possible to drive away very quickly, such as at an intersection, the automatic en‐ gine stop can be actively prevented. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. Preventing an engine stop using the brake pedal Safety mode The engine stop can be actively prevented within one second after the vehicle comes to a standstill. After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the following conditions are met. ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ The hood was unlocked. Some indicator lamps light up for varying lengths of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/ Stop button. ▷ Immediately after the vehicle comes to a standstill, briefly press the brake pedal forcefully. ▷ Then press the brake pedal with normal braking force. Activating/deactivating the system manually Using the button Note Even if driving away was not intended, the de‐ activated engine starts up automatically in the following situations: ▷ Excessive warming of the passenger com‐ partment when the cooling function is switched on. ▷ The steering wheel is turned. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from D to N, R, or M/S. ▷ Automatic transmission: the transmission position is changed from P to N, D, R or M/S. Press the button. ▷ LED comes on: Auto Start Stop function is deactivated. ▷ Fogging of the windows when the auto‐ matic climate control is switched on. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. The engine can only be stopped or started via the Start/Stop button. ▷ Excessive cooling of the passenger com‐ partment when the heating is switched on. 70 ▷ LED goes out: Auto Start Stop function is activated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, e.g., when leaving it. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. Transmission position P is engaged auto‐ matically. 2. Set the parking brake. Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. Automatic deactivation Controls Setting Pull the switch. The LED lights up. The indicator lamp lights up red. The parking brake is set. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models Set the parking brake and further secure the vehicle as required Set the parking brake firmly when parking; oth‐ erwise, the vehicle could roll. On steep upward and downward inclines, further secure the ve‐ hicle, for example, by turning the steering wheel in the direction of the curb. ◀ In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐ tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ sons, such as when the driver is detected to be absent. While driving Malfunction Use while driving serves as an emergency braking function: The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches of the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked. Parking brake Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled. The indicator lamp lights up red, a sig‐ nal sounds and the brake lamps light up. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models. The concept The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi‐ cle from rolling when it is parked. If the vehicle is braked down to a speed of ap‐ prox. 2 mph/3 km/h the parking brake is set. Releasing With the ignition switched on: Automatic transmission: Press the switch while the brake is pressed or transmission position P is engaged. The LED and indicator lamp go out. The parking brake is released. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 71 Controls Driving Automatic Release in cars with automatic transmission For automatic release, operate the accelerator pedal. The LED and indicator lamp go out. ▷ The engine is switched off. ▷ A door is opened and driver's safety belt is unbuckled while the vehicle is stationary. ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a stand‐ still using the parking brake. Subject to the following requirements, the parking brake is automatically released by op‐ eration of the accelerator pedal: The indicator lamp switches from green to red and the letters AUTO H go out. ▷ Engine on. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models. ▷ Drive mode engaged. ▷ Driver buckled in and doors closed. Inadvertent operation of the accelerator pedal Make sure that the accelerator pedal is not op‐ erated unintentionally; otherwise, the vehicle is set in motion and there is a risk of an acci‐ dent.◀ Leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐ mission and ensure that the parking brake is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ Activating Automatic Hold The concept This system assists the driver by automatically setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. This function can be activated when the driv‐ er's door is closed and the safety belt is fas‐ tened, and while driving. Press the button. The LED and the letters AUTO H light up. The indicator lamp lights up. On inclines, the system prevents the vehicle from rolling backward when driving away. Automatic Hold is activated. Deactivating Press the button again. The LED and the letters AUTO H go out. Automatic Hold is deactivated. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press on the brake pedal to deactivate it. When the parking brake is set manually, Auto‐ matic Hold is deactivated automatically. For your safety Under the following conditions, Automatic Hold is automatically deactivated and the park‐ ing brake is set: 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Driving Automatic Hold is activated: the vehicle is au‐ tomatically secured against rolling after brak‐ ing to a standstill. The indicator lamp lights up green. Step on the accelerator pedal to drive off. The brake is released automatically. The indicator lamp goes out. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian mod‐ els Before driving into a car wash Before driving into the car wash, deacti‐ vate Automatic Hold; otherwise, the parking brake will be set when the vehicle is stationary and the vehicle will no longer be able to roll.◀ Controls ing using a wheel chock, for example, when leaving it. Manual release The parking brake can be released manually in the event of a power failure or electrical fault. Before releasing, secure the vehicle against rolling Before releasing the parking brake manually, and whenever you park the vehicle with the parking brake released, ensure that position P of the automatic transmission is engaged. Secure the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the inclination of the road, e.g., with a wheel chock; otherwise, there is the danger of an ac‐ cident and injuries if the vehicle rolls uninten‐ tionally.◀ Unlocking Parking The parking brake is automatically set if the engine is switched off while the vehicle is be‐ ing held by Automatic Hold. The indicator lamp changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set if the en‐ gine is switched off while the vehicle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deactivated. Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian mod‐ els 1. Open the left side trim in the cargo area. 2. Remove the first aid kit and warning trian‐ gle. Close the bracket of the warning trian‐ gle. 3. Insert the screwdriver, in the onboard vehi‐ cle tool kit under the cargo floor panel, into the strap of the release point, see arrow. 4. Forcefully pull the screwdriver up against the mechanical resistance until you notice a marked increase in the resistance and the parking brake releases audibly. Automatic Hold remains activated during the engine stop brought about by the Auto Start/ Stop function. Take the remote control with you Take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children, for exam‐ ple, cannot release the parking brake.◀ Malfunction In the event of a failure or malfunction of the parking brake, secure the vehicle against roll‐ 5. Stow the screwdriver, warning triangle and first aid kit, and close the left side trim in the cargo area. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 73 Controls Driving Have the malfunction corrected If the parking brake has been released manually in response to a malfunction, only technicians can return it to operation. ger be in the prescribed position and will be difficult to see.◀ Using turn signals Have the malfunction corrected by your serv‐ ice center.◀ After a power failure Only put the parking brake into operation after a power failure The parking brake should only be put into op‐ eration again if it was manually released due to an interruption in the supply of electrical power. Otherwise, it cannot be ensured that the parking brake will function properly.◀ Putting the parking brake into operation Press the lever beyond the resistance point. To switch off manually, press the lever to the resistance point. Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. 1. Switch on the ignition. Triple turn signal activation 2. Press the switch while the brake is depressed or transmission position P is engaged. It may take several seconds for the brake to be put into operation. Any sounds associated with this are normal. Press the lever to the resistance point. The turn signal flashes three times. The function can be activated or deactivated: 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation. 3. "Triple turn signal" Lower lamp: indicator lamp in Canadian models. Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. Signaling briefly Turn signal, high beams, headlamp flasher Turn signal Do not fold in the exterior mirrors Do not fold in the exterior mirror while driving and when the turn signals/warning flashers are working, or else the additional flasher lights in the exterior mirror will no lon‐ 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving High beams, headlamp flasher Controls ▷ Normal wiping speed: press up once. The wipers switch to intermittent operation when the vehicle is stationary. ▷ Fast wiping speed: press up twice or press once beyond the resistance point. The wipers switch to normal speed when the vehicle is stationary. Switching off and brief wipe ▷ High beams, arrow 1. ▷ Headlamp flasher, arrow 2. Washer/wiper system Switching the wipers on/off and brief wipe Do not switch on the wipers if frozen Do not switch on the wipers if they are frozen onto the windshield; otherwise, the wiper blades and the windshield wiper motor may be damaged.◀ No wiper operation on dry windshield Do not use the windshield wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly.◀ Press the wiper levers down. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. ▷ Brief wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off normal wipe: press down once. ▷ To switch off fast wipe: press down twice. Rain sensor The concept The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. The sensor is located on the wind‐ shield, directly behind the interior rearview mir‐ ror. Switching on Press the wiper levers up. The lever automatically returns to its initial po‐ sition when released. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 75 Controls Driving Activating/deactivating Clean the windshield, headlamps Press the button on the wiper lever. Pull the wiper lever. The LED in the wiper lever lights up and a wip‐ ing operation is started. If there is frost, wiper operation is not started. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. Deactivate the rain sensor in car washes Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash; otherwise, damage could be caused by undesired wiper activation.◀ Rain sensor, sensitivity In addition, the headlamps are cleaned at regu‐ lar intervals when the vehicle lights are switched on. Do not use the washer system at freezing temperatures Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the windshield; oth‐ erwise, your vision could be obscured. For this reason, use antifreeze. Avoid using the washer when the reservoir is empty; otherwise, you could damage the pump.◀ Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automati‐ cally heated while the ignition is switched on. Turn the thumbwheel. 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Rear window wiper Switching on the rear window wiper Controls Fold the wipers back down Before switching the ignition on, fold the wipers back down to the windshield; other‐ wise, the wipers may become damaged when they are switched on.◀ 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press the wiper levers down. The wipers move to their resting position and are ready for operation. Turn switch from idle position 0 upward, ar‐ row 1: interval mode. When reverse gear is en‐ gaged, the system switches to continuous op‐ eration. Cleaning rear window In interval mode: turn the switch further, ar‐ row 2. The switch automatically returns to its interval position when released. In idle position: turn switch downward, arrow 3. The switch automatically returns to its idle po‐ sition when released. Fold-out position of the wipers Required when changing the wiper blades or under frosty conditions, for example. 1. Switch the ignition on and off again. 2. Under frosty conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen onto the wind‐ shield. 3. Press the wiper lever up beyond the point of resistance and hold it for approx. 3 sec‐ onds, until the wiper remains in a nearly vertical position. After the wipers are folded back down, the wiper system must be reactivated. Washer fluid General information Antifreeze for washer fluid Antifreeze is flammable and can cause injury if it is used incorrectly. Therefore, keep it away from sources of igni‐ tion. Only keep it in the closed original container and inaccessible to children. Follow the notes and instructions on the con‐ tainer. United States: The washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratios limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐ tainer. Use BMW’s Windshield Washer Con‐ centrate or the equivalent.◀ Washer fluid reservoir Adding washer fluid Only add washer fluid when the engine is cool, and then close the cover completely to avoid contact between the washer fluid and hot engine parts. Otherwise, there is the danger of fire and a risk to personal safety if the fluid is spilled.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 77 Controls Driving When the ignition is switched off, refer to page 67, position P is engaged automatically. P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The drive wheels are blocked. P is engaged automatically: All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐ ervoir. Fill with a mixture of windshield washer con‐ centrate and tap water and – if required – with a washer antifreeze, according to the manufac‐ turer's recommendations. Mix the washer fluid before adding to maintain the correct mixing ratio. Do not add windshield washer concentrate and antifreeze undiluted and do not fill with pure water; this could damage the wiper system. Do not mix window washer concentrates of dif‐ ferent manufacturers, because otherwise it can result in clogging of the windshield washer nozzles. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Automatic transmission with Steptronic Transmission positions D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All for‐ ward gears are available. R is Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary. N is Neutral Use in automatic car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll. 78 ▷ After the engine is switched off when the vehicle is in radio ready state, refer to page 67, or when the ignition is switched off, refer to page 67, and when position R or D is engaged. ▷ With the ignition is off, if position N is en‐ gaged. ▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and transmission position R or D is engaged. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that posi‐ tion P of the automatic transmission is en‐ gaged. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to roll. Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Press on the gas pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. Engaging the transmission position ▷ Transmission position P can only be disen‐ gaged if the engine is running and the brake pedal is pressed. ▷ With the vehicle stationary, press on the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise, the shift command will not be executed: shift lock. Depress the brake until you start driving To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Engaging D, R and N Controls Sport program and manual mode Activating the sport program Briefly push the selector lever in the desired di‐ rection, beyond a resistance point if necessary. After releasing the selector lever, it returns to its center position. Push the selector lever to the left out of trans‐ mission position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., S1. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ vated. Activating the M/S manual mode 1. Push the selector lever to the left out of transmission position D. Press unlock button, in order to: ▷ Engage R. ▷ Shift out of P. Engaging P 2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it backward. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster, e.g., M1. Once maximum engine speed is attained, M/S manual mode is automatically upshifted as needed. Switching to manual mode ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐ wards. Press button P. Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ sible if the engine speed is too high. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 79 Controls Driving Not X5 M50d: Sport automatic transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode Gears will only be shifted at appropriate engine and road speeds, e.g., downshifting is not pos‐ sible if the engine speed is too high. For vehicles with Sport automatic transmis‐ sions, automatic shift operations are not per‐ formed, at maximum engine speed for exam‐ ple, if one of the following conditions is met: The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. ▷ DSC deactivated. Displays in the instrument cluster The transmission position is dis‐ played, e.g.: P. ▷ TRACTION activated. ▷ SPORT+ activated. In addition, the kickdown is deactivated. Ending the sport program/manual mode Push the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Shift paddles Sport automatic transmission: Launch Control The concept Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on surfaces with good traction. Hints Component wear Do not use Launch Control too often; otherwise, this may result in premature wear of components due to the high stress placed on the vehicle.◀ The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. If the shift paddles on the steering wheel are used to shift gears in automatic mode, the transmission temporarily switches to manual mode. If the shift paddles are not used and the vehicle is not accelerated for a certain time, the sys‐ tem switches back into automatic mode if the selector lever is in transmission position D. ▷ Shift up: pull right shift paddle. ▷ Shift down: pull left shift paddle. Did not use Launch Control during the breakin, refer to page 190, period. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Requirements Launch Control is available when the engine is warmed up, that is, after uninterrupted driving of at least 6 miles/10 km. To start with Launch Control do not steer the steering wheel. Start with launch control While the engine is running: 1. 80 Press button or select with the Driving Dynamics Control Sport+. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving Controls TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. 2. Engaging the transmission position S 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position. A flag symbol appears in the instrument cluster. 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within 3 seconds, release the brake. Before using Launch Control, allow the trans‐ mission to cool down for approx. 5 minutes. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions, e.g., wet pavement, when used again. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 81 Controls Displays Displays Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Instrument cluster Overview, instrument cluster 1 Fuel gauge 88 5 Engine oil temperature 88 2 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 84 3 Indicator/warning lamps 86 7 Display/reset miles 89 4 Tachometer 88 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Controls Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features 1 Fuel gauge 88 5 Engine oil temperature 88 2 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 84 3 Indicator/warning lamps 86 7 Display/reset miles 89 4 Tachometer 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 83 Controls Displays Electronic displays Overview, instrument cluster 1 Clock 89 5 External temperature 89 2 Messages, e.g., Check Control 86 3 Transmission displays 80 4 Selection list, e.g., Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 135 84 Computer 93 Service requirements 90 6 Kilometer display 89 Selection list, e.g., radio 93 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Controls Overview, instrument cluster with navigation system or TV 1 Kilometer display 89 External temperature 89 Symbol for service need 2 Transmission display 80 Time 89 Current fuel consumption 90 Selection list, e.g., radio 93 Energy recovery 90 Navigation display, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. Computer 93 3 Service requirements 90 Messages, e.g., Check Control 86 Navigation display, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 85 Controls Displays Overview, instrument cluster with enhanced features 1 Messages, e.g. Check Control 86 Time 89 Kilometer display 89 5 Selection list, e.g., radio 93 2 Range 89 Current fuel consumption 90 3 Computer 93 Energy recovery 90 4 Navigation display, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. External temperature 89 Transmission display 80 Service requirements 90 Check Control Indicator/warning lamps The concept The indicator and warning lamps in the instru‐ ment cluster can light up in a variety of combi‐ nations and colors. The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions in the monitored systems. A Check Control message is displayed as a combination of indicator or warning lamps and text messages in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Several of the lamps are checked for proper functioning and light up temporarily when the engine is started or the ignition is switched on. In addition, an acoustic signal may be output and a text message may appear on the Control Display. 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Overview: indicator/warning lamps Symbol Function or system Controls Symbol Function or system Safety belts. Turn signal. Airbag system. Parking brake. Steering system. Parking brake in Canadian models. Engine functions. Automatic hold. Brake system. Front fog lamps. Brake system in Canadian models. High beams. ABS Antilock Brake System. High-beam Assistant. Parking lamps, headlamp control. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control: collision warning. Cruise control. Lane departure warning. DSC Dynamic Stability Control. DSC Dynamic Stability Control or DTC Dynamic Traction Control ABS Antilock Brake System in Canadian models. At least one Check Control mes‐ sage is displayed or is stored. Text messages Text messages in combination with a symbol in the instrument cluster explain a Check Con‐ trol message and the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as on the cause of a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. The supplementary text of urgent messages is automatically displayed on the Control Display. Tire Pressure Monitor. Flat Tire Monitor. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 87 Controls Displays Symbols 3. Depending on the Check Control message, the following functions can be selected. 4. Select the text message. ▷ Messages after trip completion "Owner's Manual" Display additional information about the Check Control message in the Integrated Owner's Manual. ▷ Special messages that are displayed during driving are displayed again after the ignition is switched off. "Service request" Contact your service center. ▷ "Check Control" "Roadside Assistance" Fuel gauge The vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Contact Roadside Assistance. US models: the arrow beside the fuel pump symbol shows which side of the vehicle the fuel filler Hiding Check Control messages flap is on. Hints on refueling, refer to page 204. Tachometer Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. ▷ Some Check Control messages are dis‐ played continuously and are not cleared until the malfunction is eliminated. If sev‐ eral malfunctions occur at once, the mes‐ sages are displayed consecutively. These messages can be hidden for approx. 8 seconds. After this time, they are dis‐ played again automatically. ▷ Other Check Control messages are hidden automatically after approx. 20 seconds. They are stored and can be displayed again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is inter‐ rupted to protect the engine. Engine oil temperature ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. Drive at moderate engine and vehicle speeds. ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ ture: the pointer is in the middle or in the left half of the temperature display. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range. A Check Control message is also displayed. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Coolant temperature Controls Time If the coolant along with the engine becomes too hot, a Check Control message is displayed. The time is displayed at the bot‐ tom of the instrument cluster. Check the coolant level, refer to page 227. Setting the time and time for‐ mat, refer to page 95. Odometer and trip odometer ▷ Odometer, arrow 1. Date The date is displayed in the computer. ▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2. Setting the date and date for‐ mat, refer to page 96. Show/reset kilometers Press the knob. Range ▷ When the ignition is switched off, the time, the external temperature and the odometer are displayed. After the reserve range is reached: ▷ A Check Control message is displayed briefly. ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip odometer is reset. External temperature External temperature warning If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. ▷ The remaining range is shown on the onboard com‐ puter. ▷ When a dynamic driving style is used, such as when cornering quickly, operation of the engine is not always ensured. The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ Displaying the cruising range Ice on roads Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃, there can be a risk of ice on roads. Therefore, drive carefully on bridges and shaded roads, for example, to avoid the in‐ creased risk of an accident.◀ 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "Additional indicators" The range is displayed in the instrument clus‐ ter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 89 Controls Displays Current fuel consumption Displays the current fuel con‐ sumption. You can check whether you are currently driv‐ ing in an efficient and environ‐ mentally-friendly manner. Detailed information on service requirements More information on the scope of service re‐ quired can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" Displaying the current fuel consumption Required maintenance procedures and le‐ gally mandated inspections are displayed. 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" "Service required" 3. 3. "Additional indicators" 4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐ tion. The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ tion is displayed in the instrument cluster. Symbols Symbols Description Energy recovery No service is currently re‐ quired. The kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted to electrical energy while coasting. The vehicle bat‐ tery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. The deadline for service or a legally mandated inspection is approaching. The service deadline has al‐ ready passed. Service requirements Entering appointment dates Display The driving distance or the time to the next scheduled maintenance is displayed briefly in the instrument cluster after the ignition is switched on. The current service requirements can be read out from the remote control by the service specialist. With TeleService, data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of your vehicle are automatically transmitted to your service center before the service due date. Enter the dates for the required inspections. Ensure that the vehicle date and time are set correctly. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Service required" 4. "§ Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" 6. Adjust the settings. 7. Confirm. The entered date is stored. 90 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Automatic Service Request Data regarding the service status or legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are auto‐ matically transmitted to your service center before a service due date. You can check when your service center was notified. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. Open "Options". 4. "Last Service Request" Gear shift indicator The concept The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ cient gear for the current driving situation. Depending on how the vehicle is equipped and the country-specific version of the vehicle, the gear shift indicator is active in the manual mode of the automatic transmission. Indicators to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the engaged gear is displayed. Displays Example Controls Speed limit detection with No Passing Information The concept Speed limit detection Speed limit detection uses a symbol in the shape of a traffic sign to display the currently detected speed limit. The camera at the base of the interior rearview mirror detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic signs with extra symbols for wet road conditions, etc. are also detected and compared with vehicle interior data, such as for the rain sensor, and are dis‐ played depending on the situation. The system takes into account the information stored in the navigation system and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. No Passing Information No Passing Information in the instrument clus‐ ter displays the beginnings and ends of no passing zones detected by the camera. The system accounts for only the beginnings and ends of No Passing zones marked by signs. No display is shown: ▷ In countries where No Passing zones are primarily identified with road markings. ▷ On routes without signage. Fuel efficient gear is engaged. ▷ Where there are railroad crossings, high‐ way markings or other situations where no signage is present, but passing would not be permitted. Shift into fuel efficient gear. Hints Description Personal judgment The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system assists the driver and does not re‐ place the human eye.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 91 Controls Displays At a glance Speed limit detection can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Camera No Passing Information ▷ Start of No Passing zone. ▷ End of No Passing zone. ▷ No Passing Information not available. No Passing Information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. System limits The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. Switching on/off ▷ When signs are concealed by objects. 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. 3. "Speed limit information" ▷ When driving toward bright lights. If speed limit detection is switched on, it can be displayed on the info display in the instru‐ ment cluster via the onboard computer. No Passing Information is displayed together with the activated speed limit information. ▷ When the windshield behind the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered by a sticker, etc. ▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the camera. Display ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation system are incorrect. The following is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. Speed limit detection Current speed limit. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in the road net‐ work. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a speed sticker. ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming. Speed limit detection is not available. 92 ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Selection lists in the instrument cluster Controls Computer Indication in the info display The concept The information from the on‐ board computer is shown in the info display in the instrument cluster. Calling up information on the info display The following can be operated using the but‐ tons and the thumbwheel on the steering wheel: ▷ Current audio source. ▷ Redial on telephone. ▷ Activation of the voice activation system. Activating a list and creating the setting Press the onboard computer button on the turn signal lever. Information is displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. Information at a glance Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn signal lever calls up the following information on the info display: ▷ Range. ▷ Average fuel consumption. On the right side of the steering wheel, turn the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding list. Using the thumbwheel, select the desired set‐ ting and confirm it by pressing the thumb‐ wheel. ▷ Average speed. ▷ Date. ▷ Speed limit detection. ▷ Time of arrival. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Distance to destination. When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. ▷ Arrow view of navigation system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 93 Controls Displays When destination guidance is activated in the navigation system. The distance to the destination is adopted au‐ tomatically. When the arrow view in the Head-up Dis‐ play is inactive. Time of arrival The estimated time of arrival is displayed if a destination is en‐ tered in the navigation system before the trip is started. ▷ Compass display in the navigation system. Adjusting the info display You can select what information from the on‐ board computer is to be displayed on the info display of the instrument cluster. The time must be correctly set. 1. "Settings" Speed limit detection 2. "Info display" Description of the speed limit detection, refer to page 91, function. 3. Select the desired displays. Compass Information in detail With Professional navigation system: compass display for the driving direction. Range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. It is calculated based on your driving style over the last 20 miles/30 km. Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the period during which the engine is running. The average fuel consumption is calculated for the distance traveled since the last reset by the onboard computer. Speed limit Display of a speed limit which, when reached, should cause a warning to be issued. The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit once by at least 3 mph/5 km/h. Displaying, setting or changing the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" Average speed 3. "Warning at:" Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the engine manually stopped do not enter into the calculation of the average speed. 4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is displayed. Resetting average values The speed limit is stored. Press and hold the computer button on the turn signal lever. Activating/deactivating the limit Distance to destination 2. "Speed" The distance remaining to the destination is displayed if a destination is entered in the navi‐ gation system before the trip is started. 3. "Warning" 94 5. Press the controller. 1. "Settings" 4. Press the controller. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Setting your current speed as the limit 1. "Settings" 2. "Speed" 3. "Select current speed" 4. Press the controller. The current vehicle speed is stored as the limit. Trip computer Controls Sport displays In the Control Display, the current values for power and torque can be displayed if the vehi‐ cle is appropriately equipped. Displaying sport displays in the Control Display 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Sport displays" The vehicle features two types of computer. ▷ "Onboard info": the values can be reset as often as necessary. ▷ "Trip computer": the values provide an overview of the current trip. Resetting the trip computer 1. "Vehicle Info" Settings on the Control Display Time Setting the time zone 1. "Settings" 2. "Trip computer" 3. "Reset": all values are reset. "Automatically reset": all values are reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle comes to a standstill. 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Time zone" 4. Select the desired time zone. The time zone is stored. Display on the Control Display Setting the time Display the onboard computer or trip computer on the Control Display. 1. "Settings" 1. "Vehicle Info" 3. "Time:" 2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer" 4. Turn the controller until the desired hours are displayed. Resetting the fuel consumption or speed 5. Press the controller. 2. "Time/Date" 1. "Vehicle Info" 6. Turn the controller until the desired mi‐ nutes are displayed. 2. "Onboard info" 7. Press the controller. 3. "Consumpt." or "Speed" The time is stored. 4. "Yes" Setting the time format 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 95 Controls Displays Units of measure The time format is stored. Date Setting the units of measure Setting the date To set the units for fuel consumption, route/ distance and temperature: 1. "Settings" 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Date:" 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is displayed. 5. Press the controller. 6. Make the necessary settings for the month and year. 3. Select the desired menu item. 4. Select the desired unit. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Brightness The date is stored. Setting the date format 1. "Settings" Setting the brightness To set the brightness of the Control Display: 1. "Settings" 2. "Time/Date" 2. "Control display" 3. "Format:" 4. Select the desired format. The date format is stored. 3. "Brightness" 4. Turn the controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 5. Press the controller. Language The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Setting the language To set the language on the Control Display: 1. "Settings" Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness control may not be clearly visible. 2. "Language/Units" 3. "Language:" 4. Select the desired language. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Setting the voice dialog Voice dialog for the voice activation system, refer to page 27. 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Displays Head-up Display Controls ▷ Speed limit detection. ▷ Cruise control. The concept ▷ Distance information. ▷ Congestion Assistant. ▷ Pedestrian warning. ▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster. Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. Selecting displays in the Head-up Display This system projects important information into the driver's field of vision, e.g., the speed. 1. "Settings" The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road. 3. "Displayed information" Display visibility The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Display is influenced by the following factors: 2. "Head-Up Display" 4. Select the desired displays in the Head-up Display. ▷ Certain sitting positions. Setting the brightness ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐ play. The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient light. ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. The basic setting can be adjusted manually. ▷ Wet roads. 1. "Settings" ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. 2. "Head-Up Display" If the image is distorted, check the basic set‐ tings. 3. "Brightness" Switching on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Head-Up Display" Display 4. Turn the controller. When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐ ing. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Adjusting the height Overview 1. "Settings" ▷ Speed. 2. "Head-Up Display" ▷ Navigation system. 3. "Height" ▷ Check Control messages. 4. Turn the controller. ▷ Collision warning. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 97 Controls Displays The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Setting the rotation 1. "Settings" 2. "Head-Up Display" 3. "Rotation" 4. Turn the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Special windshield The windshield is part of the system. The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. A film in the windshield prevents double im‐ ages from being displayed. Therefore, have the special windshield re‐ placed by a service center only. 98 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Lamps Controls Lamps Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. At a glance If the driver door is opened with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati‐ cally switched off at these switch settings. Parking lamps Switch position : the vehicle lamps light up on all sides, e.g., for parking. Do not use the parking lamps for extended pe‐ riods; otherwise, the vehicle battery may be‐ come discharged and it would then be impos‐ sible to start the engine. When parking, it is preferable to switch on the one-sided roadside parking lamps, refer to page 100. Low beams with the ignition switched Switch position on: the low beams light up. Welcome lamps When the vehicle is parked, leave the switch in position or : parking and interior lamps come on briefly when the vehicle is unlocked depending on the ambient light. 1 Rear fog lamps 2 Front fog lamps 3 Automatic headlamp control, Adaptive Light Control, High-beam Assistant, Wel‐ come lamps, Daytime running lights Activating/deactivating 4 Lamps off, daytime running lights 1. "Settings" 5 Parking lamps, daytime running lights 2. "Lighting" 6 Low beams, welcome lamps, High-beam Assistant 3. "Welcome lights" 7 Instrument lighting The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Headlamp courtesy delay feature Parking lamps/low beams, headlamp control General information Switch position: 0, , The low beams stay lit for a short while if the headlamp flasher is switched on after the igni‐ tion is switched off. Setting the duration 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 99 Controls Lamps Roadside parking lamps 3. "Pathway lighting:" 4. Set the duration. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Automatic headlamp control : the low beams are Switch position switched on and off automatically, e.g., in tun‐ nels, in twilight or if there is precipitation. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The vehicle can be illuminated on one side. A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on. Switching on The low beams always stay on when the fog lamps are switched on. With the ignition switched off, press the lever either up or down past the resistance point for approx. 2 seconds. Personal responsibility The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judg‐ ment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. Switching off For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the lamps manually under these conditions.◀ Adaptive Light Control Daytime running lights With the ignition switched on, the daytime run‐ ning lights light up in position 0, or . After the ignition is switched off, the parking lamps light up in position . Activating/deactivating In some countries, daytime running lights are compulsory, so it may not be possible to deac‐ tivate the daytime running lights. The concept Adaptive Light Control is a variable headlamp control system that enables dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road. In tight curves, e.g., on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed. Activating 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Daytime running lamps" The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. 100 Briefly press the lever to the resistance point in the opposite direction. Switch position on. with the ignition switched The cornering lamps are automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or the use of turn signals. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Lamps To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐ tive Light Control does not swivel to the driv‐ er's side when the vehicle is at a standstill. When driving in reverse, only the cornering lamp is active. Self-leveling headlamps The self-leveling headlamps compensate for acceleration and braking operations in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to achieve optimum illumination of the roadway. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. Adaptive light control is malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system checked as soon as possible. High-beam Assistant The concept When the low beams are switched on, this sys‐ tem automatically switches the high beams on and off. The procedure is controlled by a sen‐ sor on the front of the interior rearview mirror. The assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on whenever the traffic situation al‐ lows. The driver can intervene at any time and switch the high beams on and off as usual. Controls The High-beam Assistant can be activated when the low beams are switched on. 1. Turn the light switch to or . 2. Press the button on the turn signal lever, arrow. The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. When the low beams are on, the lights are au‐ tomatically brightened or dimmed. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to adequate illumination, e.g., in towns and cities. The blue indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. Depend‐ ing on the version of the system in the vehicle, the high beams may not switch off for oncom‐ ing vehicles, but may only be dimmed in the areas that blind oncoming traffic. In this case, the blue indicator light will stay on. Switching the high beams on and off manually Activating ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. ▷ High beams off/headlamp flasher, arrow 2. The High-beam Assistant can be switched off when manually adjusting the light. To reacti‐ vate the High-beam Assistant, press the but‐ ton on the turn signal lever. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 101 Controls Lamps Fog lamps System limits Personal responsibility The high-beam assistant cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. Therefore, manually switch off the high beams in situa‐ tions where this is required to avoid a safety risk.◀ The system is not fully functional in situations such as the following, and driver intervention may be necessary: ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; and at animal crossings. ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐ sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐ coming traffic on freeways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the presence of highly reflective signs. ▷ At low speeds. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. Camera Front fog lamps The low beams must be switched on. Press the button. The green indicator lamp lights up. If the automatic headlamp control, refer to page 100, is activated, the low beams will come on automatically when you switch on the front fog lamps. Instrument lighting Adjusting The parking lamps or low beams must be switched on to adjust the brightness. Adjust the brightness using the thumbwheel. Interior lamps General information The interior lamps, footwell lamps, entry lamps and courtesy lamps are controlled automati‐ cally. The brightness of some of these lamps is influ‐ enced by the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Lamps Controls Setting the brightness The brightness of the ambient light can be ad‐ justed via the thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on the Control Display. 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Brightness:" 1 Interior lamps 2 Reading lamp 4. Adjust the brightness. Switching the interior lamps on and off Press the button. To switch off permanently: press the button for approx. 3 seconds. Switch back on: press button. Reading lamps Press the button. Reading lamps are located at the front and rear next to the interior lamps. Ambient light Depending on the equipment, the lighting can be adjusted in the interior for some lights. Selecting color scheme 1. "Settings" 2. "Lighting" 3. "Lighting design" 4. Select the desired setting. To deactivate the ambient light: "Off". Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 103 Controls Safety Safety Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbags 3 Head airbag Front airbags Head airbags Front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot provide ade‐ quate restraint. In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports the head. Knee airbag The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal impact. Side airbags In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the side of the body in the chest and lap area. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Protective action Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents or rear-end collisions. Information on how to ensure the optimal protective effect of the airbags ▷ Keep at a distance from the airbags. Controls ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, the seats, the roof pillars and the sides of the headliner.◀ Even when all instructions are followed closely, injury from contact with the airbags cannot be ruled out in certain situations. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim, holding your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the danger of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible if the airbag is trig‐ gered. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hearing impairment in sensitive individuals. ▷ There should be no people, animals, or ob‐ jects between an airbag and a person. Do not touch the individual components imme‐ diately after the system has been triggered; otherwise, there is the danger of burns. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Keep the dashboard and window on the front passenger side clear, i.e., do not cover with adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach holders such as for navi‐ gation instruments and mobile phones. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐ ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the footwell; otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front airbag is triggered. ▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or other objects on the front passenger seat that are not approved specifically for seats with integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jackets, over the backrests. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag and do not rest against the head airbag; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered. In the case of a malfunction, deactivation and after triggering of the airbags Only have the airbags checked, repaired or dis‐ mantled and the airbag generator scrapped by the service center or a workshop that has the necessary authorization for handling explo‐ sives. Non-professional attempts to service the sys‐ tem could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired triggering of the airbag, either of which could result in injury.◀ Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. Functional readiness of the airbag system When the ignition is switched on, the warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. ▷ Do not remove the airbag restraint system. Airbag system malfunctioning ▷ Do not remove the steering wheel. ▷ Warning lamp does not come on when the ignition is turned on. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐ bag cover panels, cover them or modify them in any way. ▷ The warning lamp lights up continuously. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 105 Controls Safety When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately When there is a malfunction, have the airbag system checked immediately; otherwise, there is a risk that the system does not function as expected in the event of an accident despite corresponding severity of the accident.◀ Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags The system determines whether the front pas‐ senger seat is occupied by measuring the re‐ sistance of the human body. ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat unless they are specifically recommended by the manufacturer of your vehicle. ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the passenger seat if a child restraint system is to be installed on it. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that could press against the seat from below. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. Indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags The front, knee, and side airbag on the front passenger side are activated or deactivated accordingly. Leave feet in the footwell Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the footwell; otherwise, the front passenger airbags may not function properly.◀ Child restraint fixing system in the front passenger seat Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ senger seat, refer to the safety notes and in‐ structions under Children on the front passen‐ ger seat.◀ Malfunction of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deacti‐ vated in certain sitting positions. In this case, the indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags lights up. In this case, change the sitting position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. The indicator lamp for the front passenger air‐ bags indicates the operating state of the front passenger airbags. The lamp indicates whether the airbags are ac‐ tivated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator lamp lights up when a child who is properly seated in a child restraint fix‐ ing system intended for that purpose is detected on the seat or the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not acti‐ vated. ▷ The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient size is detected on the seat. The airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ tivated. To make sure that the occupied seat cushion can be evaluated correctly 106 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Detected child seats The system generally detects children seated in a child seat, especially in the child seats that were required by NHTSA when the vehicle was manufactured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated. Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag The strength with which the driver's and front passenger airbags are triggered depends on the position of the driver's and front passenger seats. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long-term, calibrate the front seats when a corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. Calibrating the front seats A corresponding message appears on the Control Display. Controls Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The concept The system monitors tire pressure in the four mounted tires. The system warns you if there is a significant loss of pressure in one or more tires. For this purpose, sensors in the tire valves measure the tire inflation pressure. Hints Tire damage due to external factors Sudden tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in advance.◀ Pay attention to the other information and indi‐ cations under Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 211, as well when using the system. Functional requirements The system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure; otherwise, relia‐ ble signaling of tire pressure loss is not en‐ sured. 1. Move the respective seat forward all the way. Reset the system again after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. 2. Move the respective seat forward again. It moves forward briefly. Always use wheels with TPM electronics to ensure that the system will operate properly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. Status display The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disap‐ pears. If the message continues to be displayed, re‐ peat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a re‐ peat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. Unobstructed area of movement Ensure that the area of movement of the seats is unobstructed to avoid personal injury or damage to objects.◀ The current status of the Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play, e.g., whether or not the TPM is active. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)" The status is displayed. Status display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 107 Controls Safety All wheels green The progress of the reset is displayed. System is active and will issue a warning rela‐ tive to the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. After a successfully completed Reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and "Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) active" is displayed. One wheel is yellow A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. The trip can be interrupted at any time. If you drive away again, the reset resumes automati‐ cally. All wheels are yellow Low tire pressure message A flat tire or major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. Wheels, gray ▷ There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. The system cannot detect a flat tire. Reasons for this may be: ▷ The system is being reset. ▷ Malfunction. Additional information The status display additionally shows the cur‐ rent tire inflation pressures. The values shown are current measurement values and may vary depending on driving style or weather condi‐ tions. Carry out reset Reset the system after each correction of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. 5. Carry out the reset with "Perform reset". ▷ No reset was performed for the system. The system therefore issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures before the last reset. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 220, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Do not continue driving without run-flat tires Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ When a low inflation pressure is indicated, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on if necessary. 6. Drive away. Actions in the event of a flat tire The tires are shown in gray and the status is displayed. Normal tires After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a short period, the tire inflation pressures set are accepted as reference values. The reset is completed automatically during driving. 108 1. Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. Then perform the reset. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Rectify the flat tire. Use of tire sealant, e.g., the Mobility Sys‐ tem, may damage the TPM wheel elec‐ tronics. In this case, have the electronics checked at the next opportunity and have them replaced if necessary. Run-flat tires Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, it is possible that a reset was not carried out for the Tire Pressure Monitor. In that case, carry out a reset. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ Controls ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.◀ Required inflation pressure check message A Check Control message is displayed. Check the tire inflation pressure and carry out a reset of the system. In some cases, a wheel was changed without having carried out a reset. System limits The system does not function properly if a re‐ set has not been carried out, e.g., a flat tire is reported even though the tire inflation pres‐ sures are correct. The tire pressure depends on the temperature of the tire. If the tire temperature rises, e.g., due to driving or because of the heat of the Sun, the tire inflation pressure increases also. The tire pressure is reduced when the tire Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 109 Controls Safety temperature falls again. This behavior may cause a warning to be issued if temperatures fall very sharply. Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. No flat tire or loss of tire pressure can be detected. Display in the following situations: ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics is fitted: have the service center check it if neces‐ sary. ▷ A wheel without TPM electronics, such as a compact wheel, is mounted: have the service center check it if necessary. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by your service center. ▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again. ▷ Disturbance by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the disturbance, the system auto‐ matically becomes active again. Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and in‐ flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐ sure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as 110 possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐ cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ tor is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐ tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐ tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. FTM Flat Tire Monitor The concept The system detects a pressure loss on the ba‐ sis of speed differences between the individual wheels while driving. In the event of a pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ sponding wheel change. This is detected and reported as a flat tire. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires. Functional requirements The system must have been initialized when the tire inflation pressure was correct; other‐ wise, reliable signaling of a flat tire is not en‐ sured. Initialize the system after each correc‐ tion of the tire inflation pressure and after every tire or wheel change. Status display The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can be displayed on the Control Display, e.g., whether or not the FTM is active. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" Controls Indication of a flat tire The yellow warning lamp lights up. A Check Control message is displayed. There is a flat tire or a major loss in tire inflation pressure. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with regular tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires, refer to page 220, are la‐ beled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Do not continue driving without run-flat tires The status is displayed. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is not equipped with run-flat tires; continued driving may result in serious accidents.◀ Initialization When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on if necessary. 3. "Flat Tire Monitor (FTM)" The initialization process adopts the set infla‐ tion tire pressures as reference values for the detection of a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains. 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Perform reset" 4. Start the engine - do not drive away. System limits Sudden tire damage Sudden serious tire damage caused by external influences cannot be indicated in ad‐ vance.◀ A natural, even pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. 5. Start the initialization with "Perform reset". The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: 6. Drive away. ▷ When the system has not been initialized. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road surface. The initialization automatically continues when driving resumes. ▷ Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 111 Controls Safety Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires 1. Identify the damaged tire. Do this by checking the air pressure in all four tires. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If an identification is not possible, please contact the service center. 2. Rectify the flat tire. Run-flat tires Maximum speed You can continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Continued driving with a flat tire If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. Possible driving distance with complete loss of tire inflation pressure: The possible driving distance after a loss of tire inflation pressure depends on the cargo load and the driving style and conditions. For a vehicle containing an average load, the possible driving distance is approx. 50 miles/80 km. When the vehicle is driven with a damaged tire, its handling characteristics change, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer 112 braking distance, and altered self-steering properties. Adjust your driving style accord‐ ingly. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driv‐ ing over obstacles, e.g., curbs, potholes, etc. Because the possible driving distance de‐ pends on how the vehicle is used during the trip, the actual distance may be smaller or greater depending on the driving speed, road conditions, external temperature, cargo load, etc. Continued driving with a flat tire Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. A loss of tire inflation pressure results in a change in the handling characteristics, e.g., re‐ duced lane stability during braking, a longer braking distance and altered self-steering properties.◀ Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indicate the final failure of the tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, and contact your service center.◀ Intelligent Safety The concept Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐ telligent Safety consists of one or more of the following systems, which can help to avoid an imminent collision. ▷ Collision warning, refer to page 113. ▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 119. ▷ Lane departure warning, refer to page 125. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to page 126 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Note Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle Controls ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Collision warning Depending on how the equipment is equipped, the collision warning system consists of one of the following functions: ▷ Collision warning with City Braking func‐ tion, refer to page 113. ▷ Collision warning with braking function, re‐ fer to page 116 Intelligent Safety button Collision warning with City Braking function The concept Switching on/off Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after each engine start via the start/ stop button. Some Intelligent Safety systems activate according to the last setting. Press the button: A panel appears on the Control Dis‐ play. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Press the button briefly: ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are indi‐ vidually switched off according to individual setting. ▷ LED lights up orange or goes out depend‐ ing on the individual setting. The system can help to prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be prevented, the system helps to reduce the collision speed. The system issues a warning if there is immi‐ nent danger of a collision and if so brakes inde‐ pendently. The automatic braking intervention is done with limited force and duration. The system is controlled via a camera in the base of the mirror. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings. Press the button again: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 113 Controls Safety General information Camera The system issues a two-phase warning of a danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. Up to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h a braking inter‐ vention occurs when appropriate. Detection range The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. Switching on/off Switching on automatically Vehicles are observed when they are traveling in the same direction of movement if they are located within the detection range of the sys‐ tem. The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ ton. Switching on/off manually Press button: a panel appears on the Control Display. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. At a glance Button in the vehicle Press the button briefly: ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual set‐ ting. ▷ The LED lights up orange. Press the button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Intelligent Safety button ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Controls Setting the warning time Braking intervention The warning time can be set via iDrive. The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐ sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐ tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. 1. "Settings" 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 3. Activate the desired warning time on the Control Display. If the vehicle is equipped with Night Vision with Dynamic Light Spot: 1. "Settings" 2. "Intelligent Safety" 3. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 4. Activate the desired warning time on the Control Display. The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. Tow-starting and towing Warning with braking function Note Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.◀ System limits Be alert Display If a collision with a vehicle detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Increase braking and distance. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma‐ neuver. Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ Detection range The system's detection capabilities are limited. This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 115 Controls Safety ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. General information ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible danger of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The time of these warnings may vary depending on the current driving situation. ▷ Pedestrians. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. Detection range ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF. ▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐ sor is dirty or obscured. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky. Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings. It responds to stationary or moving objects that are within the detection range of the radar system. At a glance Button in the vehicle Collision warning with braking function The concept The system issues a warning if there is immi‐ nent danger of a collision and also includes a braking function. Intelligent Safety button If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, the collision warning is controlled via the cruise control radar sensor in conjunction with a camera. The collision warning is available even if cruise control has been deactivated. When the vehicle is intentionally brought close to a vehicle, the collision warning is delayed to avoid false warnings. 116 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Radar sensor Controls Press the button briefly: ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual set‐ ting. ▷ The LED lights up orange. Press the button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. The radar sensor is located in the lower area of the front bumper. Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐ structed. Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Setting the warning time Camera The warning time can be set via iDrive. 1. "Settings" 2. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 3. Activate the desired warning time on the Control Display. If the vehicle is equipped with Night Vision with Dynamic Light Spot: 1. "Settings" The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. 2. "Intelligent Safety" 3. "Frontal Coll. Warning" 4. Activate the desired warning time on the Control Display. Switching on/off The selected channel is stored for the remote control currently in use. Switching on automatically Display The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ ton. Switching on/off manually Press button: a panel appears on the Control Display. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Warning stages Prewarning This warning is issued, for example, when there is the impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 117 Controls Safety Acute warning with braking function Warning of the imminent danger of a collision when the vehicle approaches another object at a relatively high differential speed. The acute warning prompts the driver to inter‐ vene and, if there is the danger of a collision, is accompanied by a braking intervention. Warning stages Symbol Measure The vehicle lights up red: prewarn‐ ing. Increase distance. The braking intervention may be executed with maximum braking force and for a brief period only as necessary. The vehicle flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warn‐ ing. The intervention can bring the vehicle to a complete stop. You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive ma‐ neuver. The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. Above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the braking intervention occurs as a brief braking pressure. No automatic delay occurs. Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. Tow-starting and towing Adapting your speed and driving style The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ System limits Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ Detection range When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.◀ The system's detection capabilities are limited. Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. The collision warning can be issued in the in‐ strument cluster, in the Head-up Display, and acoustically. This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you or sharply decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. ▷ Pedestrians. 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are limited or deactivated, for example, DSC OFF. ▷ If the camera in the mirror or the radar sen‐ sor is dirty or obscured. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If there is constant dimming because of oncoming light, for example, from the sun low in the sky. Controls lision with pedestrians and includes a braking function. The system is controlled via the camera in the base of the interior mirror. General information The system issues a warning with brightness staring at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. 35 mph/60 km/h regarding a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and assists with a brake intervention shortly before a collision. It responds to persons that are within the de‐ tection range of the system. Detection range Prewarning sensitivity Depending on the set prewarning time, this may result in increased false warnings. Pedestrian warning Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, the function warns of an imminent collision with pedestrians during daytime or nighttime. The function is subdivided into the following systems: ▷ During daytime: Pedestrian warning with city braking function, refer to page 119 ▷ At night: Night Vision with pedestrian de‐ tection, refer to page 121 The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas. ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ cated within the central area. A warning is is‐ sued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. Pedestrian warning with city braking function The concept The system can help to prevent accidents with pedestrians. The system issues a warning in the city driving speed area if there is imminent danger of a col‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 119 Controls Safety At a glance ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual set‐ ting. Button in the vehicle ▷ The LED lights up orange. Press the button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Intelligent Safety button ▷ The LED goes out. Warning with braking function Camera Note Adapting your speed and driving style The warning does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ Display The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. Switching on/off If a collision with a person detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver. Switching on automatically Braking intervention The system is automatically active every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop but‐ ton. The warning prompts the driver himself to in‐ tervene. During a warning, the maximum brak‐ ing force is used. A prerequisite for the brake booster is a sufficiently fast and sufficiently strong actuation of the brake pedal. In addition, if there is a risk of collision, the system can as‐ sist with a slight braking intervention. The in‐ tervention can bring a vehicle traveling at slow speed to a complete stop. Switching on/off manually Press button: a panel appears on the Control Display. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Press the button briefly: 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety The braking intervention is executed only if DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on and Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti‐ vated. The braking intervention can be interrupted by pressing on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. Tow-starting and towing When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.◀ System limits Controls ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the camera view field or the front wind‐ shield are dirty or covered. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐ gine, via the Start/Stop knob. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ When it is dark outside. Night Vision with Pedestrian and Animal Detection The concept Be alert Due to system limitations, warnings may be not be issued at all, or may be issued late or improperly. Therefore, always be alert and ready to intervene; otherwise, there is the dan‐ ger of an accident occurring.◀ Detection range The detection capability of the camera is lim‐ ited. This may result in the warning not being is‐ sued or being issued late. Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion is a night vision system. An infrared camera records the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street. Warm objects that are similar in shape to human be‐ ings or animals are detected by the system. If necessary, the heat image can be displayed on the Control Display. Heat image For example, the following situations may not be detected: ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such because of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain, sprayed water or snow‐ fall. The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of view of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects, a dark appearance. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 121 Controls Safety are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to de‐ tect. For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambi‐ ent light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A still image is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second. Pedestrian and animal detection Environmental influences can limit the availa‐ bility of object detection. If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is located in a residential area, the animal detec‐ tion is temporarily switched off. Notes Personal responsibility Night Vision cannot replace the driver's personal judgment of the visibility conditions and the traffic situation. The view ahead and the actual visibility conditions must always be the basis on which the vehicle speed is ad‐ justed; otherwise, there is a risk to road safety.◀ At a glance Buttons in the vehicle Object detection and warning only functions in darkness. Warm objects that are similar in shape to hu‐ man beings are detected by the system. In addition, the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size, e.g., deer. With heat image activated on the Control Dis‐ play: People detected by the system are displayed with a slight yellow hue. Intelligent Safety button Animals detected by the system are displayed in a darker yellow. Under good ambient conditions, the object de‐ tection operates within the following distance ranges: ▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx. 330 ft/100 m ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx. 490 ft/150 m Switch on/switch off heat image ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to ap‐ prox. 230 ft/70 m 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Controls Switching on heat image additionally Camera The heat image from the Night Vision camera can also be displayed on the Control Display. This function has no effect on object detec‐ tion. Press the button. The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display. The camera is automatically heated when the external temperatures are low. The camera is automatically cleaned together with the headlamps. Switching on/off Switching on automatically Every time the engine is started using the Start/Stop button, the system is automatically active at dark. Switching on/off manually Press button: a panel appears on the Control Display. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Adjustments via the iDrive With heat image switched on: 1. Press the controller. 2. Select brightness or contrast. ▷ Select the symbol. ▷ Select the symbol. 3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Display Warning of people or animals in danger Press the button briefly: If a collision with a person or an animal de‐ tected in this way is imminent, a warning sym‐ bol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual set‐ ting. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, false warnings cannot be ruled out. ▷ The LED lights up orange. Press the button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 123 Controls Safety Warning area in front of the vehicle Acute warning The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ nal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or making an evasive maneuver. With animals no acute warning occurs. Display in the Head-up Display The warning area for the pedestrian warning consists of two parts: ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and left. The warning is displayed simultane‐ ously in the Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster. The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected. When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed. In the animal warning, no distinction is made between the central or expanded area. System limits The entire area moves along with the vehicle in the direction of the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed increases, the area becomes longer and wider, for example. Basic limits ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight curves. ▷ When the camera is dirty or the protective glass is damaged. Prewarning The yellow symbol is displayed when a person is detected in the central area, arrow 1, immediately in front of the ve‐ hicle. The yellow symbol is displayed when a person in the extended area, arrow 2, is moving from the right or left towards the central area. The displayed symbol can vary with the people detected. Intervene actively by braking or making an eva‐ sive maneuver. When animals are detected, an animal symbol is displayed. The symbol also shows the side of the road on which the animal was detected. Intervene actively by braking or making an evasive maneuver. 124 System operation is limited in situations such as the following: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ At very high external temperatures. Limits of pedestrian and animal detection In some situations, it may occur that pedes‐ trians are detected as animals or animals as pedestrians. Small animals are not detected by the object detection function, even if they are clearly visi‐ ble in the image. Limited detection: ▷ People or animals who are fully or partially covered, especially when their heads are covered. ▷ People who are not in an upright position, e.g., lying down. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., recumbent bicycles). At a glance ▷ After physical damage to the system, e.g., after an accident. Button in the vehicle Controls No display on the rear screen The image from Night Vision with people de‐ tection cannot be displayed on the rear screen. Lane departure warning The concept Intelligent Safety button Starting at a specific speed, this system alerts you when the vehicle on streets with lane markings is about to leave the lane. This speed, depending on the country version, is between 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h. Camera The steering wheel begins vibrating gently in the event of warnings. The time of the warning may vary depending on the current driving sit‐ uation. The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set before leaving the lane. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Notes Personal responsibility The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the course of the road and the traffic situation. In the event of a warning, do not jerk the steer‐ ing wheel, as you may lose control of the vehi‐ cle.◀ Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rear view mirror clean and clear. Switching on/off Switching on automatically The lane departure warning is automatically activated after the engine is started via the Start/Stop button, if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stopped. Switching on/off manually Press button: a panel appears on the Control Display. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 125 Controls Safety Press the button briefly: ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual set‐ ting. ▷ In the event of worn, poorly visible, merg‐ ing, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. ▷ The LED lights up orange. ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. Press the button again: ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ When the lane markings are covered by objects. ▷ The LED lights up green. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Lines: system is activated. ▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking was detected and warnings can be issued. ▷ When driving toward bright lights. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov‐ ered with stickers, etc. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. Active Blind Spot Detection The concept Issued warning If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel begins vi‐ brating. If the turn signal is set before changing the lane, a warning is not issued. End of warning The warning ends: ▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When using the turn signal. System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. 126 Two radar sensors below the rear bumper monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle at speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h. The system indicates whether there are vehi‐ cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind on the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The lamp in the exterior mirror housing lights up dimly. Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐ uations described above. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety The lamp in the housing of the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. Controls Switching on/off Switching on automatically Notes Personal responsibility The system does not serve as a substi‐ tute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. Be aware of the traffic situation and the vehi‐ cle's surroundings at all times, otherwise an accident is still possible despite all warnings.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle The Active Blind Spot Detection is automati‐ cally activated after the engine is started via the Start/Stop button, if the function was switched on the last time the engine was stop‐ ped. Switching on/off manually Press button: a panel appears on the Control Display. Adjustments can be made. The individual settings are stored for the remote control currently in use. Press the button briefly: ▷ Intelligent Safety systems are individually switched off according to individual set‐ ting. ▷ The LED lights up orange. Press the button again: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ The LED lights up green. Intelligent Safety button Hold the button down: ▷ All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. ▷ The LED goes out. Radar sensors Display The radar sensors are located under the rear bumper. Information stage The dimmed lamp in the mirror housing indi‐ cates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or approaching from behind. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 127 Controls Safety Brake force display Warning If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly and the lamp in the mirror housing flashes brightly. The concept The warning stops when the turn signal is switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the critical zone. System limits The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ During normal brake application, the outer brake lamps light up. ▷ In heavy fog, rain or snowfall. ▷ During heavy brake application, the inner brake lamps light up in addition. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. ▷ If the bumper is dirty or iced up, or covered with stickers. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: General information The Active Protection safety package consists of systems that are independent of each other: ▷ Attentiveness assistant. ▷ PreCrash ▷ PostCrash Attentiveness assistant ▷ NBG009014A. Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 128 Active Protection The concept The system can detect increasing lack of alert‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, mo‐ notonous journeys, for example, on highways. In this situation, it is recommended that the driver take a break. Note Personal responsibility The system cannot act as a substitute for the personal assessment of one's physical state and may not detect an increasing lack of alertness or fatigue or may not detect it cor‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Safety Controls rectly. Therefore, make sure that the driver is rested and alert; otherwise, risks may be de‐ tected too late and an accident be caused as a result.◀ ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. Function PreCrash The system is activated each time the engine is started and cannot be switched off. The concept After travel has begun, the system is trained about the driver, so that increasing lack of alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, for example, steer‐ ing behavior. ▷ Driving conditions, for example, length of trip. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can display a recommen‐ dation to take a break. Break recommendation If the driver becomes increasingly less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. A recommendation to take a break is displayed only once during an uninterrupted trip. After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes. System limits The function may be limited in the following situations, for instance, and will either output an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the clock is set incorrectly. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering quickly. ▷ When the road surface is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. With this system critical driving situations that might result in an accident can be detected above a speed of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. In these situations, preventative protection measures are automatically undertaken to minimize the risk in the event of an accident as much as possible. Critical driving situations may include: ▷ Full brake applications. If the vehicle includes the collision warning or collision warning with braking feature, impend‐ ing collisions with vehicles driving ahead or stopped in front of you can also be detected within the system's range. Note Personal responsibility The system cannot possibly serve as a substitute for the driver's personal judgment of the traffic situation. The system may not al‐ ways detect critical situations reliably and in a timely manner. Adapt speed to traffic situation and drive alertly; otherwise, a risk to safety may result.◀ Function After the safety belt is buckled, the front belts are automatically pretensioned once after the vehicle is driven is away. In critical driving situations, the following indi‐ vidual functions become active as needed: ▷ The front belts are automatically preten‐ sioned. ▷ Automatic closing of the windows. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 129 Controls Safety ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof. ▷ For vehicles equipped with Comfort Seats: automatic positioning of the backrest for the front passenger seat. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ dent, the front belts are loosened again. All other systems can be restored to the desired setting. If the belt tension does not loosen automati‐ cally, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the belt using the red button in the buckle. Fasten the belt before continuing on your trip. PostCrash In the event of an accident, the system can bring the car to a halt automatically without in‐ tervention by the driver in certain situations. This can reduce the risk of a further collision and the consequences thereof. Depressing the brake pedal can cause the ve‐ hicle to brake harder. This interrupts automatic braking. Depressing the accelerator pedal also interrupts automatic braking. After coming to a halt, the brake is released automatically. Secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving stability control systems Controls Driving stability control systems Vehicle equipment Drive-off assistant All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. This system supports driving away on gradi‐ ents. The parking brake is not required. Antilock Brake System ABS ABS prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle remains steerable even during full brake applications, thus increasing active safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost. This then reduces braking dis‐ tance to a minimum during full braking. This system utilizes all of the benefits provided by ABS. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking. When equipped with Driving Assistant Plus or with Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC is supported by the braking in‐ tervention if there is a possible risk of collision. To do this, the braking force is automatically increased if the braking pressure is insufficient when the brakes are applied. 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive away without delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer is being used, the vehicle may roll back slightly. Driving off without delay After releasing the foot brake, start driv‐ ing without delay, since the drive-off assistant will not hold the vehicle in place for more than approx. 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin rolling back.◀ Automatic Differential Brake The system controls the driving force by auto‐ matic braking intervention on individual wheels. The function corresponds to a differ‐ ential lock: the system detects if a wheel be‐ gins to spin, because of loose road surface, for example, and automatically brakes it. The driving force is diverted to the wheel with better traction. As a result, the engine force is transferred more efficiently to the wheels during accelera‐ tions. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 131 Controls Driving stability control systems Dynamic Performance Control The Dynamic Performance Control increases both the agility of the vehicle as well as the lane stability. The system seamlessly handles the distribu‐ tion of the drive torque between the two rear wheels. Depending on the situation, the drive torque is shifted from the wheel on the inside of the curve to the wheel on the outside of the curve or vice-versa. To increase the maneuverability, the rear wheel on the outside of the curve is acceler‐ ated when the driving style is correspondingly sporty. The steering responds directly; simultane‐ ously, the understeering tendency of the fourwheel drive is canceled out. With the oversteering tendency, the system exerts a stabilizing effect by accelerating the rear wheel on the inside of the curve. The system noticeably improves the traction and simultaneously increases the driving safety, especially on road surfaces having fluc‐ tuating coefficients of friction. DSC Dynamic Stability Control An appropriate driving style is always the responsibility of the driver. The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. Therefore, do not reduce the additional safety margin by driving in a risky manner.◀ Indicator/warning lamps The indicator lamp flashes: DSC con‐ trols the drive forces and brake forces. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC has failed. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is reduced during acceleration and when driving in bends. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Deactivating DSC Press and hold the button, but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed. The DSC system is switched off. Activating DSC Press the button. The concept DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when driving away and accelerating. DSC also recognizes unstable vehicle condi‐ tions, such as fishtailing or nose-diving. Sub‐ ject to physical limits, DSC helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing engine speed and by applying brakes to the individual wheels. 132 Adjust your driving style to the situation DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Indicator/warning lamps When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving stability control systems DTC Dynamic Traction Control The concept The DTC system is a version of the DSC in which forward momentum is optimized. Controls The indicator lamp lights up: DTC Dy‐ namic Traction Control is activated. xDrive It is therefore necessary to drive with appropri‐ ate caution. xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC further optimize traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all-wheel-drive system variably dis‐ tributes the drive forces to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driving situation and road surface. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances: Display on the Control Display The system ensures maximum forward mo‐ mentum on special road conditions, e.g., unp‐ lowed snowy roads, but driving stability is lim‐ ited. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snow-covered roads. ▷ When rocking the vehicle or driving off in deep snow or on loose surfaces. ▷ When driving with snow chains. Displaying xDrive view 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "xDrive status" 3. "xDrive view" The following information is displayed: Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic Traction Control ▷ With Professional navigation system: com‐ pass display for the driving direction Activating the Dynamic Traction Control DTC provides maximum traction on loose ground. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. ▷ Pitch attitude with degree and percentage Activating DTC Displaying distribution of the drive torque Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up. Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐ tor lamp go out. Indicator/warning lamps When DTC is activated, TRACTION is dis‐ played in the tachometer. ▷ Transverse gradient with degree indication ▷ Graphic display for the steering 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "xDrive status" 3. "Torque distribution" HDC Hill Descent Control The concept HDC is a downhill driving assistant that auto‐ matically controls vehicle speed on steep downhill gradients. Without applying the brakes, the vehicle moves at slightly more than walking speed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 133 Controls Driving stability control systems Hill Descent Control can be activated at speeds below approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. When driving downhill, the vehicle reduces its speed to approx. walking speed and then keeps its speed constant. Activating HDC As long as there is active braking, the system is on standby. The system does not brake the vehicle during this time. Use HDC in low gears or in transmission posi‐ tion D or R only. Increasing or decreasing vehicle speed Specify desired speed in the range from ap‐ prox. 4 mph/6 km/h to approx. 15 mph/25 km/h using the rocker switch of the cruise control on the steering wheel. Vehicle speed can be changed by lightly accelerating. Press the button; the LED above the but‐ ton lights up. Deactivating HDC Press the button again and the LED goes out. HDC is automatically deactivated above approx. 37 mph/60 km/h. Display in the instrument cluster The selected speed is displayed in the speedometer. ▷ Green: the system is actively braking the vehicle. ▷ Orange: the system is on standby. ▷ Press up the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed increases gradually. Malfunction ▷ Press up the rocker switch past the point of resistance: the speed increases while the rocker switch is pressed. A message is displayed in the instrument clus‐ ter. HDC is not available, e.g., due to elevated brake temperatures. ▷ Press down the rocker switch to the point of resistance: the speed decreases gradu‐ ally. Active Steering ▷ Press down the rocker switch past the point of resistance: when driving forward, the speed decreases to approx. 6 mph/10 km/h; when reversing, the speed decreases to approx. 4 mph/6 km/h. 134 Active Steering varies the steering angle of the wheels in relation to the steering wheel move‐ ment as a function of the speed. At lower speeds, for example during turning or maneuvering, the steering angle is increased, that is to say the steering becomes more di‐ rect. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving stability control systems Controls At higher speeds, the steering angle is increas‐ ingly reduced. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 135. This enables even more precise handling at high speeds and more responsive steering with reduced steering angle at low speeds. SPORT/SPORT+ Active roll stabilization Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ sorbers for greater driving agility. COMFORT/ECO PRO Balanced tuning. The concept The system reduces the lateral inclination of the vehicle that occurs during rapid driving in curves or during quick evasive maneuvers. Self-leveling suspension Driving stability and driving comfort are in‐ creased under all driving conditions. The sys‐ tem utilizes active stabilizer bars on the front and rear axles that react immediately to all driv‐ ing situations. The concept Programs The system ensures consistent comfort by keeping spring travel constant in all driving sit‐ uations. The system offers two different programs. The programs can be selected via the Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 135. SPORT Sporty tuning for greater driving agility. COMFORT Comfort-oriented tuning for optimal comfort. Vertical Dynamic Control The self-leveling suspension keeps the vehicle height and ground clearance constant. The height of the vehicle at the rear axle is main‐ tained at a predefined level under all load con‐ ditions. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. A mal‐ function has occurred in the self-leveling sus‐ pension. Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit your nearest service center. Driving Dynamics Control The concept The concept This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐ tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐ eling on uneven road surfaces. The system enhances driving dynamics and comfort as required for the road surface and driving style. The Driving Dynamics Control can be used to adjust the driving dynamics of the vehicle. For this purpose various programs are available for selection that are activated via the two buttons of the Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC OFF-button. Programs The system offers several different programs. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 135 Controls Driving stability control systems Operating the programs Press the button The indicator lamp lights up: DSC OFF is activated. Program DSC OFF TRACTION TRACTION Maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Driv‐ ing stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT ECO PRO Activating TRACTION Press the button. Automatic program change The system may automatically switch to COM‐ FORT in the following situations: ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control, Dy‐ namic Drive or xDrive. TRACTION is displayed in the tach‐ ometer. The DSC indicator lamp in the instrument clus‐ ter lights up. Deactivating TRACTION Press the button again. DSC OFF Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in bends. To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF Press and hold the button, but not lon‐ ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the indicator lamp for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐ strument cluster and DSC OFF is displayed in the tachometer. TRACTION and the DSC indicator lamp go out. Indicator/warning lamps When TRACTION is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the tachometer. The indicator lamp lights up: TRAC‐ TION is activated. SPORT+ The DSC system is switched off. Sporty driving with optimized chassis and adapted engine control with limited driving sta‐ bilization. Activating DSC Dynamic Traction Control is switched on. Press the button. DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator lamp go out. Indicator/warning lamps When DSC OFF is activated, DSC OFF is dis‐ played in the tachometer. 136 The driver handles several of the stabilization tasks. Activating SPORT+ Press the button repeatedly until SPORT+ appears in the tachometer and the DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving stability control systems Automatic program change When switching on the adjustable speed limit or activating cruise control, the program auto‐ matically switches to SPORT mode. Indicator/warning lamps Comfort functions and the engine controller are adjusted. The program can be configured to individual specifications. Activating ECO PRO SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. The DSC OFF indicator lamp lights up: Dynamic Traction Control is activated. Controls Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. Configuring ECO PRO SPORT Consistently sporty tuning of the suspension and engine control for greater driving agility with maximum driving stabilization. 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" Make the desired settings. The program can be configured to individual specifications. Displays in the instrument cluster The configuration is stored for the remote con‐ trol currently in use. Selected program The selected program is dis‐ played in the tachometer. Activating SPORT Press the button repeatedly until SPORT appears in the tachometer. COMFORT Program selection For a balanced tuning with maximum driving stabilization. Pressing the button displays a list of the selectable programs. Activating COMFORT Press the button repeatedly until the program display in the tachometer goes out. In certain situations, the system automatically changes to the NORMAL program, automatic program change, refer to page 136. Display on the Control Display Program changes can be displayed briefly on the Control Display. To do so, make the following settings: 1. "Settings" ECO PRO ECO PRO, refer to page 198, provides consis‐ tent tuning to minimize fuel consumption for maximum range with maximum driving stabili‐ zation. 2. "Control display" 3. "Driving mode info" Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 137 Controls Driving comfort Driving comfort Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. The speed is also maintained on downhill gra‐ dients, but may not be maintained on uphill slopes if engine power is insufficient. General information Depending on the set driving program, the characteristics of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Hints Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go function, ACC The concept This system can be used to select a desired speed that the vehicle will maintain automati‐ cally on clear roads. To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the system au‐ tomatically reduces the speed, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehi‐ cle ahead begins moving faster. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. If the vehicle ahead of your drives away again from a halt, your vehicle is able to accelerate if operated accordingly. Even if some time passes before the vehicle ahead of you drives away again, your own vehi‐ cle can still be accelerated automatically and simply. Personal responsibility Even an active system does not release the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process, especially for lane tracking, adaptation of speed, distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. Monitor the driving process, the surrounding area and what is occurring in traffic continu‐ ously and attentively and actively intervene as required, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver.◀ Unfavorable weather conditions In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles and lane limits as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already detected. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.◀ As soon as the road is clear, it accelerates to the desired speed. 138 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Controls At a glance Buttons on the steering wheel Press the button Function Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing, refer to page 139 Store/maintain speed, refer to page 140 A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐ tection of vehicles. Resume speed, refer to page 141 ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully. Reduce distance, refer to page 141 ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor. Increase distance, refer to page 141 Camera With Congestion Assistant: Ad‐ just distance, refer to page 141 Rocker switch: Change/maintain speed, refer to page 140 Congestion assistant: Conges‐ tion assistant on/off, interrupt‐ ing, refer to page 145 The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐ try-specific variants. Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. A dirty or covered area in front of the interior mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles. ▷ If necessary, clean the area in front of the interior mirror, e.g., carefully remove salt residue in the winter. Switching on/off and interrupting cruise control Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 139 Controls Driving comfort The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light up and the mark in the speedometer is set to the current speed. very little traffic without road edge line markings. Cruise control can be used. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is dis‐ rupted, for example, by dirt or heavy fog. Switching off Maintaining/storing the speed Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ Press the button. Or: If switching off the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If active: press twice. ▷ If interrupted: press once. The displays go out. The stored desired speed and distance are deleted. Interrupting Press the button on the steering wheel. If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ When the brakes are applied. ▷ When transmission position D is disen‐ gaged. ▷ When DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ When DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened when the vehicle is standing still. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. This is displayed in the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster. Displays in the instrument cluster, refer to page 142. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Changing, maintaining, and storing the speed The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted to maintain and store the current speed. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, e.g., on a road with 140 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Speed differences Large differences in speed relative to other vehicles cannot be compensated by the system for example in the following situations: ▷ When catching up rapidly with a truck. ▷ When another vehicle suddenly swerves into the wrong lane. ▷ When stationary objects are approached at speed.◀ Controls Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. The selected distance, refer to page 142, is displayed in the instrument cluster. Increase distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. The selected distance, refer to page 142, is displayed in the instrument cluster. With Congestion Assistant: adjust distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. Calling up the desired speed and distance If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. While driving ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Press the button with the system switched on. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. While standing Before leaving the vehicle, secure it against rolling Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run‐ ning, engage position P of the automatic trans‐ mission and apply the parking brake. Other‐ wise, the vehicle may begin to roll.◀ The system brought the vehicle to a complete standstill. ▷ Green marking in the speedometer: Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 141 Controls Driving comfort Your vehicle accelerates automatically as soon as the vehicle in the range of the ra‐ dar sensor moves off. ▷ Marking in the speedometer turns orange: no automatic driving away. To accelerate to the desired speed auto‐ matically, press the accelerator or press the RES or SET button. Rolling bars in the distance display indicate that the vehicle in the radar sensor detection range has moved off. Your vehicle was braked to a halt by pressing on the brake pedal and it is standing behind another vehicle: 1. Press the button to call up a stored desired speed. 2. Release the brake pedal. 3. Press on the accelerator briefly, or press the RES rocker switch when the vehicle ahead of you drives away. Displays in the instrument cluster Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. Brief status display Selected desired speed. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements for operation are currently not met. 142 Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown. Distance display Distance 1 Distance 2 Distance 3 Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on. The system has been interrupted or distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was not detected. Distance control is deactivated be‐ cause the accelerator pedal is being pressed; a vehicle was detected. Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven away. Indicator/warning lamps Personal responsibility The indicator and warning lamps do not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her desired driving speed and style to the traffic conditions.◀ The vehicle symbol lights up orange: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol flashes orange: The conditions are not adequate for operating the system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you actively resume control by pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal. The vehicle symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: You are requested to intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver. Controls Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected. Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in‐ tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Displays in the Head-up Display Deceleration The information from Active Cruise Control can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. The system does not decelerate for: Adjusting the Head-up Display, refer to page 97. ▷ Pedestrians or similar slow-moving road users. ▷ Red traffic lights. ▷ Cross traffic. System limits ▷ Oncoming traffic. Speed range Best results are achieved when using the sys‐ tem on well-developed roads and highways. The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. Swerving vehicles The maximum speed that can be set depends on the vehicle. The system can also be activated when sta‐ tionary. Comply with the legal speed limit in every sit‐ uation when using the system. Detection range A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected until it is completely within the same lane as your vehicle. Swerving vehicles The detection capacity of the system and the automatic braking capacity are limited. If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ tance. This also applies to major speed differ‐ ences to vehicles driving ahead of you, e.g., when rapidly approaching a truck. When a ve‐ hicle driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out evasive maneu‐ vers, if necessary. You must react yourself; Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 143 Controls Driving comfort otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Cornering Driving away In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive away automatically, e.g., on steep inclines or behind bumps in the road. Radar sensor For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov‐ erned by the following: FCC ID: If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly in the curve, although curves cannot be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. In tight curves, situations may result due to the restricted detection range of the system in which a vehicle driving ahead of you may not be detected at all, or not until after a consider‐ able delay. ▷ OAYARS3-A Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: ▷ This device may not cause harmful inter‐ ference, and ▷ this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. Malfunction When approaching a curve, the system may react briefly to the vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. Any deceleration of the vehicle by the system can be compensated for by briefly accelerating. After the accelerator pedal is released, the system becomes active again and independently controls the speed. The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails. The function for detecting and responding when approaching stationary vehicles may be limited in the following situations: ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐ ately after vehicle shipment. ▷ If the camera is malfunctioning or dirty. A Check Control message is displayed. 144 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Controls Congestion Assistant adaptation of speed, distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. The concept Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. In congestion situations, the system controls the speed, steers independently as required and keeps the vehicle close to the center of the lane. To the extent possible, the system automati‐ cally adjusts the speed to a slower vehicle ahead of you. The distance that the vehicle maintains to the vehicle ahead of you can be varied. For safety reasons, it depends on the speed. To maintain a certain distance, the sys‐ tem automatically reduces the speed, applies the brakes lightly, or accelerates again if the vehicle ahead begins moving faster. When lane markings are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the center of the lane. For this purpose, the system steers independently as needed, for example, during cornering. General information The congestion assistant determines speed and distance from the vehicle in front and the position of the lane markings via a radar sensor and a camera. Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched. Monitor the driving process, the surrounding area and what is occurring in traffic continu‐ ously and attentively and actively intervene as required, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver.◀ Unfavorable weather conditions In the event of unfavorable weather and light conditions, e. g. if there is rain, snowfall, slush, fog or glare, this may result in poorer recognition of vehicles and lane limits as well as short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already detected. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic events. Intervene actively when necessary, e.g., by braking, steering or making an evasive maneuver, otherwise, there is danger of an accident.◀ Functional requirements ▷ Drive on approved road type. The data on this are stored in the navigation system. Approved road types are highways. ▷ Sufficient lane width. The system is deactivated as soon as the steering wheel is no longer being touched. ▷ Lane marking on both sides is detected. In order to be able to use the Congestion As‐ sistant, place your hands around the steering wheel. ▷ Speed below 25 mph/40 km/h. When driving with gloves or with protective covers, contact with the steering wheel cannot be detected by the sensors. The system in this case cannot be used. ▷ Vehicle driving ahead is detected. ▷ Both hands on the steering wheel rim. ▷ Sufficient curvature. ▷ Drive in the center of the lane. Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not release the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process, especially for lane tracking, Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 145 Controls Driving comfort At a glance Camera Buttons on the steering wheel Press the button Function Congestion Assistant ON/OFF, Pause, refer to page 146. Rocker switch: Store, change/maintain speed, refer to page 140. The camera is located near the base of the mirror. Maintain, store speed, refer to page 140. Keep the windshield in the area behind the in‐ terior rearview mirror clean and clear. Resume speed, refer to page 141. A dirty or covered area in front of the interior mirror may hinder the detection of vehicles. Adjust distance, refer to page 141. ▷ If necessary, clean the area in front of the interior mirror, e.g., carefully remove salt residue in the winter. Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. Switching on/off and pausing Switching on Press the button. ▷ Prepare system: press once. ▷ Activate system: If the ACC is not activated: press rocker. With ACC activated: system is ready. Drive in the center of the lane. A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐ tection of vehicles. ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully. ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor. The system is automatically activated be‐ low 25 mph/40 km/h. If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. If ACC is not activated: indicator lamp in the instrument cluster comes on. Congestion Assistant can be used. With Congestion Assistant switched on, the Pedestrian Warning system is active. The set‐ ting in the Control Display is unchanged. 146 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking, steering and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ Press the button. The indicator goes out. Stored desired speed and distance are still kept by the ACC. The system does not carry out a steering movement. Interrupting When active, press the button. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: ▷ At a speed above 25 mph/40 km/h. ▷ With only one detected lane marking. ▷ When you leave the limited access high‐ way. Controls If the system conditions are met, the system reactivates automatically. When you leave the approved road type, the system is first interrupted and then shuts down. Distance Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Adjust distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. Distance to vehicle ahead of you The selected distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you is shown. Distance display Distance 1 ▷ When the steering wheel is released. ▷ When you intervene in the steering. Distance 2 ▷ When you leave your own lane. ▷ When there is no vehicle ahead. Distance 3 ▷ When the turn signal is on. ▷ When the lane is too narrow. Rolling bars: Congestion assistant is no longer ac‐ celerating. To accelerate further, acti‐ vate ACC by briefly pressing the accelerator, pressing the RES button or rocker switch. Red flashing and signal tone: Congestion Assistant is interrupted. The system does not carry out a steer‐ ing movement. ACC exercises control. Distance 4 This value is set after the system is switched on. Selecting a distance Adjust the distance according to the traf‐ fic and weather conditions; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring. Maintain the prescribed safety distance.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 147 Controls Driving comfort Displays in the instrument cluster Symbol Description Cruise control The concept Congestion Assistant and Distance Control on standby. Congestion Assistant on standby. Distance control controls within the set distance. Congestion Assistant activated. The system controls the speed and assists with maintaining the lane. Rolling bars: speed is no longer in‐ creased by the congestion assistant at 25 mph/40 km/h. When the speed is increased by the driver, the system does not perform any more steering movements. Red flashing and signal tone: con‐ gestion Assistant is interrupted. The system does not carry out a steering movement. ACC exercises control. System limits When driving within narrow driving lanes, e.g., in construction zones or rescue lanes, the sys‐ tem cannot be activated or meaningfully used. Limited detection capacity Because of the limits to the detection ca‐ pacity of the camera and the sensor, you should be alert at all times so that you can in‐ tervene actively, if necessary; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Complying with country-specific laws When the Congestion Assistant is used, observe specific national laws.◀ The system is functional at speeds beginning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h. It maintains the speed that was set using the control elements on the steering wheel. The system brakes on downhill gradients if en‐ gine braking action is insufficient. Unfavorable conditions Do not use the system if unfavorable conditions make it impossible to drive at a con‐ stant speed, for instance: ▷ On curvy roads. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow or rain, or on a loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehi‐ cle and cause an accident.◀ General information Depending on the set driving program, the characteristics of the cruise control can change in certain areas. Controls At a glance Press the button Function Cruise control on/off, interrupt‐ ing, refer to page 149 Store/maintain speed, refer to page 149 Resume speed, refer to page 150 Rocker switch: Change/maintain speed, refer to page 149 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort The arrangement of the buttons varies accord‐ ing to the how the vehicle is equipped or coun‐ try-specific variants. Controls Or: Switching on Press the button on the steering wheel. The marking in the speedometer is set to the current speed. The cruise control can be used. Switching off Deactivated or interrupted system If the system is deactivated or inter‐ rupted, actively intervene by braking and, if necessary, with evasive maneuvers; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident occurring.◀ Press the button on the steering wheel. ▷ If active: press twice. Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐ terrupted. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the desired speed. It is displayed in the speedometer and briefly displayed in the instrument cluster, Displays in the speedometer, refer to page 150. When cruise control is maintained or stored, DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. ▷ If interrupted: press once. Changing/maintaining speed The displays go out. The stored desired speed is deleted. The rocker switch can be pressed while the system is interrupted in order to maintain and store the current speed. Interrupting When active, press the button. The system is automatically interrupted if: ▷ The brakes are applied. Adapting the desired speed Adapt the desired speed to the road con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of an accident oc‐ curring.◀ ▷ The transmission position D is disengaged. ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated or DSC is deactivated. ▷ DSC is actively controlling stability. ▷ HDC is activated. ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving Dynamics Control. Maintaining/storing the current speed Press the button. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 149 Controls Driving comfort If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed if the road is clear. ▷ The marking does not light up: the system is switched off. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h. Brief status display ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the point of resistance, the desired speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐ mum of 5 mph/10 km/h. If --- appears briefly on the display for Check Control messages, it is possible that the sys‐ tem requirements for operation are currently not met. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ pends on the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ celerates the vehicle without requiring pressure on the accelerator pedal. After the rocker switch is released, the vehicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. Resuming the desired speed Press the button. The stored speed is reached and maintained. Displays in the instrument cluster Indicator lamp Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐ ped, the indicator lamp in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐ tem is switched on. PDC Park Distance Control The concept PDC supports you when parking. Objects that you are approaching slowly in front of or be‐ hind your vehicle are indicated by: ▷ Signal tones. ▷ Visual display. General information Measurements are made by ultrasound sen‐ sors in the bumpers. The range, depending on the environment, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning is first given: ▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐ ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm. ▷ By the rear middle sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. To ensure full operability: ▷ Do not cover sensors, e.g., by stickers, bi‐ cycle racks and the like. Desired speed ▷ The marking lights up green: the system is active. ▷ The marking lights up or‐ ange: the system has been interrupted. 150 Selected desired speed. ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process. Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle and the traffic situation, and actively intervene when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.◀ Avoid driving quickly with PDC Avoid approaching an object quickly. Avoid driving away quickly while PDC is not yet active. For technical reasons, the system may other‐ wise be too late in issuing a warning.◀ At a glance Controls ▷ If, with the appropriate equipment, obsta‐ cles are detected behind or in front of the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower than approx. 2 mph/3 km/h. Automatic activation when obstacles are de‐ tected can be switched off: 1. "Settings" 2. "Parking" 3. Select the setting. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. Switching on/off manually Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. Button in the vehicle ▷ Off: the LED goes out. In addition to the PDC Park Distance Control, the rearview camera, refer to page 153, can be switched on. Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" PDC Park Distance Control The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Switching on/off Display Switching on automatically Signal tones PDC switches on automatically in the following situations: When approaching an object, an intermittent tone is sounded that indicates the position of the object. For example, if an object is de‐ ▷ If the engine is running, select transmis‐ sion position R. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 151 Controls Driving comfort tected to the left rear of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear speaker. The shorter the distance to the object be‐ comes, the shorter the intervals. If the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 10 in/25 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. If objects are located both in front of and be‐ hind the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig‐ nal is sounded. The signal tone is switched off: ▷ When the vehicle moves away from an ob‐ ject by more than approx. 4 in/10 cm. ▷ When transmission position P is engaged. Volume The volume of the PDC signal can be adjusted, refer to user's manual for Navigation, Enter‐ tainment, Communication. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Visual warning The approach of the vehicle to an object can be shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are displayed on the Control Display before a signal tone sounds. A display appears as soon as Park Distance Control (PDC) is activated. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors red, green and yellow. If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display. To switch to PDC: 1. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. 2. Press the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. System limits Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi‐ cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐ trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐ aged. ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure, such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. False warnings PDC may issue a warning under the following conditions even though there is no obstacle within the detection range: ▷ In heavy rain. ▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered in ice. ▷ When sensors are covered in snow. ▷ On rough road surfaces. 152 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. ▷ In large buildings with right angles and smooth walls, e.g., in underground ga‐ rages. ▷ In heavy exhaust. ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, e.g., sweeping machines, high pressure steam cleaners or neon lights. Malfunction Controls Hints Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects lo‐ cated outside the picture area of the backup camera.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle A Check Control message is displayed. The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded area on the Control Display. PDC has failed. Have the system checked. To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Surround View Rearview camera Camera The concept Surround View comprises various camera as‐ sistance systems that help the driver when parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits and intersections. ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 153 ▷ Top View, refer to page 156. ▷ Panorama Side View, refer to page 158. Backup camera The camera lens is located in the handle of the tailgate. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 247. The concept The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. Switching on/off Switching on automatically Select transmission position R with the engine running. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 153 Controls Driving comfort The rearview camera image is displayed if the system was switched on via the iDrive. Pathway lines Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. Switching on/off manually ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐ age. Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The PDC is shown on the Control Display. Switching on the rearview camera via the iDrive With PDC activated or Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" ▷ Help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. ▷ Are dependent on the current steering an‐ gle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Turning circle lines The rearview camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Display on the Control Display Functional requirement ▷ The rearview camera is switched on. ▷ The tailgate is fully closed. Activating the assistance functions More than one assistance function can be ac‐ tive at the same time. ▷ Parking aid lines "Parking aid lines" ▷ Can be shown in the rearview camera im‐ age. ▷ Show the course of the smallest possible turning circle on a level road. ▷ Only one turning circle line is displayed af‐ ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer‐ tain angle. Pathway and turning circle lines are dis‐ played. ▷ Obstacle marking "Obstacle marking" Spatially-shaped markings are displayed. 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Obstacle marking Controls 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the pathway line covers the corresponding turning circle line. General information Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC sensors and, when appropriately equipped, detected by the rearview camera. Display settings Marks for detected obstacles can be shown in the rearview camera image. With the rearview camera switched on: Brightness Their colored steps match the markings of the PDC. This simplifies estimation of the distance to the object shown. 1. Parking using pathway and turning circle lines Contrast 1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir‐ cle lines lead to within the limits of the parking space. 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. With the rearview camera switched on: Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. System limits Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Assistance functions also take into account data of the PDC. Follow instructions in the PDC chapter, refer to page 150. The objects displayed in the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 155 Controls Driving comfort Top View Cameras The concept Top View provides assistance in parking and maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. General information The image is captured by two cameras integrated in the exterior mirrors, by the rear‐ view camera and a camera on the front of the vehicle. Front camera The range is no more than approx. 6.5 ft/2 m to the side, front and rear. Obstacles within this range are thus displayed early on the Control Display. Notes Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle with your own eyes. Otherwise, an acci‐ dent could result from road users or objects lo‐ cated outside the picture area of the cameras.◀ At a glance Button in the vehicle The lenses of the Top View cameras are lo‐ cated at the bottom of the exterior mirror hous‐ ings. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 247. Functional requirements Top View can be used only to a limited extent in the following situations: ▷ With a door open. ▷ With the tailgate open. ▷ With an exterior mirror folded in. ▷ In poor light. The unavailable camera range is depicted with cross-hatching. Top View Switching on/off Switching on automatically Select drive mode R with the engine running. 156 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort The Top View and PDC images are displayed if the system is switched on via iDrive. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on if necessary. Switching on/off manually Press the button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Top View is displayed. Switching on the backup camera via the iDrive With Top View switched on: "Rear view camera" The backup camera image is displayed. The setting is stored for the remote control cur‐ rently in use. Display Display on the Control Display The area surrounding the vehicle can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. The display appears as soon as Top View is activated. If the rearview camera image was selected last, it again appears on the display when reverse gear is selected. To switch to Top View: Controls Brightness With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Contrast With Top View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Displaying the turning circle and pathway lines ▷ The static, red turning circle line shows the space needed to the side of the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned all the way. ▷ The variable, green pathway line assists you in assessing the amount of space ac‐ tually needed to the side of the vehicle. The lane line depends on the engaged drive mode and the current steering angle. The track line is continuously adjusted for the steering wheel movement. "Parking aid lines" Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed. System limits A Check Control message is displayed when a camera is defective. "Rear view camera" Select the symbol on the Control Display. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 157 Controls Driving comfort Panorama Side View At a glance The concept Button in the vehicle Panorama Side View provides an early look at cross traffic at blind driveways and intersec‐ tions. Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be de‐ tected relatively late from the driver's seat. To improve the viewing, each camera, front and rear on the vehicle, detects the traffic area on the side. Panorama Side View Cameras Which camera is active is shown on the top edge of the screen. Hints The images of the cameras are displayed, de‐ pending on the gear selected, on the Control Display. Front camera Check the traffic situation as well Check the traffic situation around the ve‐ hicle on blind driveways and intersections with your own eyes. Otherwise, an accident could result from road users or objects located out‐ side the picture areas of the Panorama Side View cameras.◀ Rear camera Two cameras are used for the detection. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. Clean the lens, refer to page 247. 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Controls Switching on/off ▷ Your vehicle moves no faster than walking speed. Switching on/off manually ▷ To detect approaching objects, sufficient brightness, for example, daylight is neces‐ sary. Press the button. Depending on the transmission position, the picture of the front or rear camera is displayed. Switching off automatically By switching into a different function or during drive mode change. Front Panorama Side View: when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Display The yellow symbol is displayed if an approaching vehicle is detected by the camera. A gray symbol is displayed if the detec‐ tion of crossing traffic is not possible. Display System limits General information In the following situations, the warning about crossing traffic may be limited: The traffic area in front of or behind the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display. ▷ In poor lighting or visibility conditions. Brightness With Panorama Side View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. ▷ If the camera is soiled or covered. System limits The objects displayed in the Control Display under certain circumstances are closer than they appear. Therefore, do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. The viewing angle is approx. 180°. Contrast With Panorama Side View switched on: 1. Select the symbol. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting is reached, and press the controller. Parking assistant The concept Warning of crossing traffic The concept If an object approaching from the side is de‐ tected by the front or rear camera, this is de‐ picted by a symbol in the Panorama Side View display. Requirements ▷ Panorama Side View switched on. This system assists the driver in parking paral‐ lel to the road. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 159 Controls Driving comfort Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐ sible parking line and during the parking proce‐ dure takes control of steering, the acceleration and braking and if necessary changes the drive modes. Hold down the parking assistant but‐ ton for the duration of the parking operation. At the end of the parking procedure, the P selec‐ tor lever position is engaged. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ dent occurring.◀ Curbs The parking assistant may steer the vehi‐ cle over or onto curbs. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, the wheels, tires, or the vehi‐ cle may become damaged.◀ When parking, also take note of the visual and acoustic information and instructions issued by the PDC, the parking assistant and the rear‐ view camera and react accordingly. An engine that has been switched off by the Auto Start Stop function is restarted automati‐ cally when the parking assistant is activated. A component of the parking assistant is the PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 150. Requirements For measuring parking spaces Hints Personal responsibility Even an active system does not relieve the driver from personal responsibility for the driving process. Because of technical system limits, the system cannot independently react appropriately in all traffic situations. Continuously and attentively monitor the driv‐ ing process, the area surrounding the vehicle and the traffic situation, and actively intervene when required, otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.◀ Changes to the parking space Changes to the parking space after it was measured are not taken into account by the system. ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐ prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Suitable parking space ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. ▷ Minimum length of the gap: own vehicle's length plus approx. 4 ft/1.2 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. For parking procedure ▷ Doors and tailgate closed. ▷ Parking brake released. Therefore, always be alert and ready to inter‐ vene; otherwise, there is the danger of an acci‐ dent occurring.◀ Transporting loads Loads that extend beyond the perimeter of the vehicle are not taken into account by the system during the parking procedure. 160 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort At a glance Controls Switching on with the reverse gear Button in the vehicle Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. "Parking Assistant" Select the Activate: symbol in the Control Display. Switching off The system can be deactivated as follows: ▷ Parking assistant Press the button. ▷ Switch off the ignition. Display on the Control Display Ultrasound sensors System activated/deactivated Symbol Meaning Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated. The system is activated. The ultrasound sensors for measuring parking spaces are located on the wheel arches. To ensure full operability: ▷ Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. ▷ When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the sensors for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm. Status display Depending on the appointment version, differ‐ ent views of the status display are shown and are described below as View 1, refer to page 161, or View 2, refer to page 162. Status of the system, Display 1 Switching on/off Switching on with the button Press the button. The LED lights up. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. The status is displayed with symbols. Parking assistant is activated automatically. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 161 Controls Driving comfort Gray: parking space search. Blue: the system is activated. A suitable parking space was found. road as on the Control Display. When the parking assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted. ▷ The parking procedure is active. Steering control has been seized. Status of the parking space search The parking procedure is ac‐ tive. Steering control has been seized. ▷ Parking space search is always active whenever the vehicle is moving forwards slow and straight, even if the system is de‐ activated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. Parking using the parking assistant Check the traffic situation as well Loud sounds outside and within the vehi‐ cle can drown out the signal tones of the park‐ ing assistant and PDC. ▷ Gray, arrow 1: parking space search. ▷ Blue, arrow 2: parking space is suitable. The vehicle is parked in the parking space if the parking procedure is active. Check the traffic situation around the vehicle with your own eyes; otherwise, there is the danger of an accident.◀ 1. Switch on the parking assistant and acti‐ vate it if necessary. ▷ No display: no parking space search. Status of the system, Display 2 The status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. The end of the parking procedure is indi‐ cated on the Control Display. 3. Adjust the parking position yourself if nec‐ essary. Interrupting manually ▷ Colored symbols, see arrows, on the side of the vehicle representation. Parking as‐ sistant is activated and search for parking space active. The parking assistant can be interrupted at any time: ▷ ▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol on the Control Display. Press the button. ▷ Suitable parking spaces are displayed next to the vehicle symbol at the edge of the 162 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving comfort Controls Interrupting automatically Functional limitations The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: The system may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When the button is released. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or if he takes over steering. ▷ If a gear is selected that does not match the instruction on the Control Display. ▷ During acceleration. ▷ When setting the parking brake. ▷ If a turn signal is activated in the opposite direction to the desired side for parking. ▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. ▷ On snow-covered or slippery road surfaces if necessary. ▷ If doors are open. ▷ If the tailgate is open. ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly arise. ▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts or the time taken for parking is exceeded. A Check Control message is displayed. Continuing An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐ tinued if necessary. Follow the instructions on the Control Display to do this. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ When leaves or snow has collected in the parking space. Limits of ultrasonic measurement The detection of objects can reach the physi‐ cal limits of ultrasonic measurement, e.g., in the following circumstances: ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ For persons with certain clothing, e.g. coats. ▷ If there is an external disturbance of the ul‐ trasound, e.g. from passing vehicles or loud machines. ▷ When sensors are soiled, iced over or dam‐ aged. ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high relative humidity, rain, snowfall or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer hitches of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges or cargo. ▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges. System limits ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure, such as fences. No parking assistance ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. The parking assistant does not offer assis‐ tance in the following situations: Low objects already displayed, e.g., curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. ▷ In tight curves. The parking assistant may identify parking spaces that are not suitable for parking. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 163 Controls Driving comfort Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ If necessary, clean the radar sensor. Re‐ move layers of snow and ice carefully. The parking assistant failed. Have the system checked. ▷ Do not cover the view field of the radar sensor. Switching on Distance information 1. Switching on Head-Up Display, refer to page 97. The concept 2. "Distance info": Select the indication in the Head-Up Display, refer to page 97. The system displays a symbol in the Head-up Display to indicate that the distance behind the vehicle in front is not sufficient. General information The distance is determined by the radar sen‐ sor of the Active Cruise Control. Hints Display in the Head-up Display The symbol is displayed when the dis‐ tance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short. Functional requirements ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. Personal responsibility The display does not relieve the driver of the responsibility to adapt his or her distance and driving style to the traffic conditions. Main‐ tain the prescribed safety distance.◀ ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected. ▷ Distance too short. ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h. Malfunction At a glance Radar sensor A radar sensor is located in the front bumper for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the vehicle. The system cannot be activated if the radar sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be caused by damage incurred during parking, for example. A Check Control message is displayed if the system fails. A dirty or covered sensor may hinder the de‐ tection of vehicles. 164 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Climate control Controls Climate control Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Automatic climate control 1 Air distribution, left 11 Air distribution, right 2 Temperature, left 12 Seat heating, right 53 3 AUTO program, left 13 Active seat ventilation, right 53 4 Air flow, AUTO intensity, left, residual heat 5 Remove ice and condensation 14 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐ lated-air mode 6 Maximum cooling 15 Cooling function 7 Display 16 Rear window defroster 8 Air volume, AUTO intensity, right 17 SYNC program 9 AUTO program, right 18 Active seat ventilation, left 53 10 Temperature, right 19 Seat heating, left 53 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 165 Controls Climate control Climate control functions in detail Manual air distribution Press the button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region. The cooling function, refer to page 167, is switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐ gram. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window condensation as much as possible. ▷ Upper body region and footwell. Intensity of the AUTO program ▷ Footwell. With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐ matic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted. ▷ Windows and footwell. ▷ Windows, upper body region, and footwell. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ ▷ Windows: driver's side only. ▷ Windows and upper body region. sity. If the windows are fogged over, press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the condensation sensor. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Temperature Air flow, manual Turn the wheel to set the de‐ sired temperature. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ sary with the maximum cooling or heating ca‐ pacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ just the set temperature. AUTO program Press the button. Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically. Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO intensity program and outside influen‐ ces, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the footwell. 166 To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power. Defrosting windows and removing condensation Press the button. Ice and condensation are quickly re‐ moved from the windshield and the front side windows. The air volume can be adjusted when the pro‐ gram is active. If the windows are fogged over, you can also switch on the cooling function or press the AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐ sor. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Climate control Maximum cooling Controls Cooling function Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. The vents need to be open for this. The function is available above an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the engine running is indicated. The air flow can be adjusted when the program is active. Automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated-air mode You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollu‐ tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐ rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. Press the button repeatedly to select an operating mode: ▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. ▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air control: a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air and controls the shutoff auto‐ matically. ▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ manently blocked. If the windows are fogged over, switch off the recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO button on the driver's side to utilize the con‐ densation sensor. Make sure that air can flow onto the windshield. Continuous recirculated-air mode The recirculated-air mode should not be used for an extended period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates stead‐ ily.◀ The passenger compartment can only be cooled with the engine running. Press the button. The air is cooled and dehumidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog up briefly when the engine is started. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. When using the automatic climate control, condensation water, refer to page 192, devel‐ ops that exits underneath the vehicle. Rear window defroster Press the button. The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain period of time. SYNC program The current settings on the driver's side for temperature, air flow, air distri‐ bution, and AUTO program are transferred to the front passenger side and to the left and right rear. The program is switched off if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed. Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the interior. Functional requirement ▷ Up to 15 minutes after switching off the engine. ▷ Warm engine. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. ▷ External temperature below 77 ℉/25 ℃. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 167 Controls Climate control Switching on 1. Switch off the ignition. 2. Press the right side of the button on the driver's side. The symbol appears on the automatic cli‐ mate Control Display. The interior temperature, air volume and air distribution can be adjusted with the ignition switched on. This combined filter should be replaced during scheduled maintenance, refer to page 229, of your vehicle. Ventilation Front ventilation Switching off At the lowest fan speed, press the left side of the button on the driver's side. The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes. Switching the system on/off ▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 1. Switching off Toward blue: colder. ▷ Complete system: Toward red: warmer. Press and hold the left button on the driver's side until the control clicks off. ▷ On the front passenger side: Press and hold the left button on the front passenger side. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrows 3. Adjusting the ventilation ▷ Ventilation for cooling: Switching on Adjust the vent to direct the air in your di‐ rection, e.g., if the vehicle interior is hot from the sun. Press any button except: ▷ SYNC program. ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Left side of Air volume button. ▷ Draft-free ventilation: Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you. ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Seat ventilation. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter removes gaseous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Climate control Controls Ventilation in rear, center ▷ Thumbwheels to vary the temperature, ar‐ row 1. Toward blue: colder. ▷ Button for switching on the fan, arrow 1. LED comes on. ▷ Thumbwheel for the activation of the heat and distribution of the air, arrow 2. Turn toward the front: activate the heater and distribute the air in the footwell. Toward red: warmer. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2. ▷ Thumbwheels for continuous opening and closing of the vents, arrow 3. Lateral ventilation Turn toward the rear: distribute the air in the storage area between the seats. The heater is not ready for operation without switching on the fan. After the heater is switched off, the fan can be used to circulate the interior air, e.g., at high temperatures. To do this, switch on the fan, arrow1 and turn the thumbwheel toward the rear, arrow 2. Rear automatic climate control At a glance ▷ Thumbwheel for opening and closing the vents continuously, arrow 1. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, arrow 2. Heating and ventilation, third row of seats The air in the area of the third row of seats can be heated or circulated. The vents are located in the storage area between the seats and in the footwell of the third row of seats. 1 Temperature 2 AUTO program 3 Vent settings 4 Air volume, AUTO intensity Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 169 Controls 5 Display 6 Maximum cooling 7 Seat heating 55 Climate control Temperature Turn the wheel to set the de‐ sired temperature. Switching the rear automatic climate control on/off 1. "Settings" 2. "Climate" 3. "Rear climate" The rear automatic climate control is not op‐ erational if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting or defogging the windows is active. The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ sary by using the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant. Avoid rapidly switching between different tem‐ perature settings. The automatic climate con‐ trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Manual air distribution AUTO program Press the button. Air flow, air distribution, and tempera‐ ture are controlled automatically: Depending on the selected temperature, the AUTO intensity, and outside influences, the air is directed to the upper body and into the foot‐ well. The air distribution can be adjusted to individ‐ ual needs. Press the button repeatedly to select a program: ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Upper body region and footwell. ▷ Footwell. The cooling function is switched on automati‐ cally with the AUTO program. Air flow, manual Intensity of the AUTO program To be able to manually adjust the air flow, switch off the AUTO program first. With the AUTO program switched on, auto‐ matic control of the air flow and air distribution can be adjusted. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase the inten‐ sity. Press the left or right side of the but‐ ton: decrease or increase air flow. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Switching the system on/off The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Switching off Press and hold the left button. Switching on Press any button except: ▷ Left side of Air volume button. 170 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Climate control ▷ Seat heating. Controls monoxide, an odorless and colorless but highly toxic gas. Switch off the parked-car heating when refueling.◀ Maximum cooling Press the button. The system is set to the lowest tem‐ perature, maximum air flow and air circulation mode. Air flows out of the vents for the upper body region. Open them for this purpose. Air is cooled as quickly as possible: ▷ At an external temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃. Operation of the parked-car heating When parked-car heating is in operation, high temperatures can occur under the car body. Before the parked-car heating is switched on, make sure that no flammable ma‐ terials, such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. are un‐ der the vehicle. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious personal in‐ jury as well as property damage.◀ ▷ When the engine is running. At external temperatures below 32 ℉/0 ℃, wa‐ ter vapor occurs that emerges from below the vehicle. Parked-car ventilation/ heating Functional requirements The concept The parked-car ventilation ventilates the vehi‐ cle interior and lowers its temperature, if nec‐ essary. The parked-car heating warms the vehicle in‐ terior, making snow and ice easier to remove. With the ignition switched off, the air is auto‐ matically routed to the windshield, to the side windows, and into the footwell. The systems can be switched on and off di‐ rectly or by using two preset departure times. The switch-on time is automatically deter‐ mined based on the temperature. The systems promptly switch on before the selected depar‐ ture time. Operation takes place on the iDrive or the re‐ mote control. Parked-car ventilation ▷ With remote control or when the departure time is preselected: depends on internal, external and set temperature. ▷ Direct operation via iDrive: any external temperature. ▷ In direct mode via remote control: external temperature above approx. 59 ℉/15 ℃. Open the vents to allow air to flow out. Parked-car heating ▷ With remote control or when the departure time is preselected: depends on internal, external and set temperature. ▷ Direct operation via iDrive: any external temperature. ▷ In direct mode via remote control: external temperature below approx. 59 ℉/15 ℃. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. Hints Parked-car heating in enclosed areas Do not operate the parked-car heating in enclosed areas, as breathing of the harmful ex‐ haust fumes may lead to loss of consciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon ▷ The fuel tank is filled to above the reserve range. If the parked-car heating has not been used for several months, it may be necessary to switch the system on again after several minutes. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 171 Controls Climate control Switching on/off directly 1. "Settings" Remote control At a glance 2. "Climate" 3. "Activate comfort heating" or "Activate comf. ventilation" The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes if the system is switched on. The system continues to run for some time af‐ ter being switched off. Preselecting the departure time 1. "Settings" 1 Display 2 Selection buttons 3 OK 4 MENU Buttons Press the button 2. "Climate" Function Decrease or increase the se‐ lection. 3. "Dep. time 1:" or "Dep. time 2:" 4. Set the desired time. Activating the departure time Press briefly: 1. "Settings" - Switch on remote control. 2. "Climate" - Switch menu. 3. "Activate depart. time 1" or "Activate depart. time 2" Press and hold down: The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol lights up when the departure time is acti‐ vated. Confirm the selection. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐ trol flashes when the system has been switched on. The system will only be switched on within the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to reacti‐ vated. - Switch off remote control. Symbols Symbols Meaning Parked-car ventilation/heating Timer 1. Timer 2. 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Climate control Symbols Controls The function is deactivated. Meaning Radio reception. Parked-car ventilation/heating Remote control battery indica‐ tor. Activating Parked-car ventilation/heating fault. 1. 2. Tank contents too low. Vehicle battery charging state too low. No radio reception. Press button to activate parked-car ventilation/heating. Deactivating 1. 2. Switching on Press button briefly until the display lights up. Select menu. Select menu. Press button to deactivate parkedcar ventilation/heating. Timer Two timers can be set with different times. The last menu opened is displayed. Only one timer can ever be activated. Switching off Activating Press for approx. 2 seconds until the dis‐ play is switched off. If no entry is made for 10 seconds, the display shuts off automatically. 1. Select Timer 1 or Timer 2. 2. Press the button to set the hour. 3. Press the button. Select menu The following menus can be selected via the remote control. ▷ Parked-car ventilation/heating ▷ Timer 1 ▷ Timer 2 Press the button repeatedly until the de‐ sired menu is displayed. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. It indicates whether the function is acti‐ vated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. The function is activated. 4. Press the button to set the mi‐ nute. 5. Press the button twice to activate the timer. Deactivating 1. Select desired timer. 2. Press the button to deactivate the timer. Remote control range The reception-dependent average range is ap‐ prox. 490 ft/150 m. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 173 Controls Climate control The range is greatest if the remote control is kept horizontally toward the front. Frequencies The remote control may not function properly if it experiences interference from other sys‐ tems or devices that use the same frequency. Replacing the batteries Replace the batteries if a check control mes‐ sage is displayed or the battery indicator flashes. No rechargeable batteries Do not use rechargeable batteries, as damage may result from the substances in the batteries.◀ 1. Use a suitable object to unclip the battery compartment, arrow 1. 2. Remove the cover of the battery compart‐ ment, arrow 2. 3. Insert batteries of the same type. 4. Press the cover closed. Take the used battery to a recycling center or to your service center. Malfunction The symbol indicates that there is a fault in the parked-car ventilation/heating. Have the system checked by the service center. 174 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Interior equipment Controls Interior equipment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Universal garage door opener ally compatible with the universal garage door opener. If you have any questions, please contact: ▷ Your service center. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of John‐ son Controls, Inc. Controls on the interior rearview mirror The concept The universal garage door opener can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled sys‐ tems such as garage door drives or lighting systems. The universal garage door opener re‐ places up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior rearview mirror must be program‐ med with the desired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. ▷ LED, arrow 1. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. During programming During programming and before activat‐ ing a device using the integrated universal re‐ mote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects in the range of movement of the remote-controlled device; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored functions for the sake of security. Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packag‐ ing or in the instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is gener‐ Programming General information 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Initial setup: Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the LED on the interior rearview mirror flashes. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. 3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 175 Controls Interior equipment rearview mirror. The required distance de‐ pends on the manual transmitter. and continuous illumination of the LED will re‐ peat for approximately 20 seconds. 4. Simultaneously press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter and the button to be program‐ med on the interior rearview mirror. The LED on the interior rearview mirror will be‐ gin flashing slowly. For systems with an alternating-code system, the universal garage door opener and the sys‐ tem also have to be synchronized. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED flashes more rapidly. When the LED is flashing faster, this indicates that the but‐ ton on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐ ond person. If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ tween the interior rearview mirror and the hand-held transmitter and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distan‐ ces may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. 6. To program other functions on other but‐ tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ rior rearview mirror buttons. Special feature of the alternatingcode wireless system If you are unable to operate the system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features an alternat‐ ing-code system. Read the system's operating manual, or press the programmed button on the interior rear‐ view mirror longer. If the LED on the interior rearview mirror starts flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for 2 seconds, the system features an alternating-code system. Flashing 176 Please read the operating manual of the sys‐ tem being set up for information on how to synchronize the system. To synchronize: 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐ mote-controlled system. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior rearview mirror as described. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the interior rearview mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this work step up to three times in order to finish synchronization. Once syn‐ chronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out. Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Switch on the ignition. 2. Press and hold the interior rearview mirror button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the interior rearview mirror LED starts flashing slowly, hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons on the interior rearview mirror. The required distance depends on the manual transmitter. 4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held trans‐ mitter. 5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ rior rearview mirror LED flashes more rap‐ idly. When the LED is flashing faster, this Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Interior equipment indicates that the button on the interior rearview mirror has been programmed. The system can then be controlled by the button on the interior rearview mirror. Ashtray If the LED does not flash faster after at least 60 seconds, change the distance and repeat the step. Several more attempts at different distances may be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds between attempts. Opening Canada: if programming with the handheld transmitter was interrupted, hold down the interior rearview mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 sec‐ onds. Controls Before operation Before operating a system using the integrated universal remote control, ensure that there are no people, animals, or objects within the range of movement of the remotecontrolled system; otherwise, there is a risk of injury or damage. Also follow the safety instructions of the handheld transmitter.◀ The system, such as the garage door, can be operated using the button on the interior rear‐ view mirror while the engine is running or when the ignition is started. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior rear‐ view mirror LED stays lit while the wireless sig‐ nal is being transmitted. Deleting stored functions Controls Front Slide the cover forward. Emptying Take out the insert. Lighter Hints Danger of burns Only hold the hot lighter by its knob; oth‐ erwise, there is the danger of getting burned. Switch off the ignition and take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle so that children cannot use the lighter and burn themselves.◀ Replace the cover after use Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Press and hold the left and right button on the interior rearview mirror simultaneously for ap‐ proximately 20 seconds until the LED flashes rapidly. All stored functions are deleted. The functions cannot be deleted individually. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 177 Controls Interior equipment Connecting electrical devices Front At a glance Hints Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.◀ Replace the cover after use The lighter is located next to the ashtray. Controls Reinsert the lighter or socket cover after use, otherwise objects may get into the lighter socket or fixture and cause a short circuit.◀ Sockets Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment while the engine is run‐ ning or when the ignition is switched on. The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Rear Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable connectors. At a glance Front center console The cigarette lighter is located in the rear cen‐ ter console. Slide the cover forward. Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. Controls Push in the lighter. The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out. 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Interior equipment Controls USB interface for data transfer Center armrest The concept Connection for importing and exporting data on USB devices, e.g.: ▷ Personal Profile settings, refer to page 35. ▷ Music collection, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. Remove the cover. Rear center console At a glance Remove the cover or cigarette lighter. The USB interface is located in the center arm‐ rest. In the cargo area Notes Observe the following when connecting: ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐ nector into the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect devices such as fans or lamps to the USB interface. ▷ Do not connect USB hard drives. ▷ Do not use the USB interface to recharge external devices. Fold open the cover. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 179 Controls Interior equipment Cargo area Cargo cover Hints Hook the cargo cover on both sides Hook the cargo cover on both sides to prevent damaging the cover.◀ Do not deposit heavy objects Do not deposit heavy or hard objects on the cargo cover. Otherwise, they may pose a risk to occupants, such as during braking and avoidance maneuvers.◀ Do not let the trunk cover snap back into place Do not allow the trunk cover to snap back into place; this can damage it.◀ Attaching 1. Press the button, arrow 1, to unlock the cover. 2. Pull the cover back, arrow 2. Installing Slide the cover forward horizontally into the two side brackets until it audibly latches. The red warning fields disappear. Tug on the cover to check if it is properly locked in place. Enlarging the cargo area General information The cargo area can be enlarged by folding down the rear seat backrest. The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of 40–20–40. The sides and the middle section can be folded down separately. Hints Danger of pinching 1. Remove cargo cover, arrow 1. 2. Hook cargo cover into the brackets on both sides, arrow 2 Removing The cover can be removed to load bulky lug‐ gage. Before folding down the rear seat back‐ rests, ensure that the area of movement of the backrests is clear. In particular, ensure that no one is located in or reaches into the area of movement of the rear seat backrests when the middle section is folded down. Otherwise, in‐ jury or damage may result.◀ Lock the rear seat backrests in position Before installation of child restraint sys‐ tems on the rear seat backrest, set a backrest tilt at which the childseat rests firmly against the backrest and securely latch all backrests. Otherwise, the stability of the child seat is lim‐ 180 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Interior equipment ited, and there is an increased risk of injury be‐ cause of unexpected movement of the rear seat backrest.◀ Controls Folding down the middle section Ensure that the lock is securely engaged When folding back the backrest, make sure that it securely locks in place. When this happens the red warning field on the seat dis‐ appears. If the backrest is not properly en‐ gaged, transported cargo could enter the pas‐ senger compartment during braking or evasive maneuvers and endanger the vehicle occu‐ pants.◀ Using the middle safety belt If the middle safety belt in the rear is used, the larger section of the backrest must be locked. Otherwise, the safety belt will not have a restraining effect.◀ Folding down the sides Move the front seats to an upright posi‐ tion Before folding down the rear backrests, ensure that the front seats are moved forward slightly and are in an upright position. Otherwise, the head restraint and screen could be damaged.◀ Reach into the recess and pull forward. Ski and snowboard bag General information The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the cargo area. Follow the installation and operation instruc‐ tions included in the protective jacket. Sun visor Glare shield from the side Folding out 1. Fold the sun visor down. 2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the side. 3. Move it back to the desired position. Folding up Reach into the recess and pull forward. Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun visor. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 181 Controls Storage compartments Storage compartments Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Notes No loose objects in the passenger com‐ partment Glove compartment Front passenger side Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Opening Do not stow any objects in the passenger compartment without securing them; other‐ wise, they may present a danger to occupants for instance during braking and avoidance ma‐ neuvers.◀ Do not place anti-slip mats on the dash‐ board Do not place anti-slip mats on the dashboard. The mat materials could damage the dash‐ board.◀ Storage compartments The following storage compartments are avail‐ able in the vehicle interior: ▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger side, refer to page 182. ▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side, refer to page 183. ▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to page 183. Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on. The net in the glove compartment is used to store small objects. Closing Fold cover closed. Locking After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐ mote control can be handed over, such as at a hotel, without the integrated key. ▷ Storage compartment on the center arm‐ rest, refer to page 183. ▷ Center armrest, refer to page 183 ▷ Glasses compartment, refer to page 184. 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Storage compartments Controls Storage compartment on the center console Driver's side Note Close the glove compartment again im‐ mediately Opening Close the glove compartment immediately af‐ ter use while driving; otherwise, injury may oc‐ cur during accidents.◀ Opening Slide the cover forward. Closing Slide the cover rearward. Small storage compartment Pull the handle. Closing Fold cover closed. Compartments in the doors Do not stow any breakable objects Do not store any breakable objects, e. g. glass bottles, in the compartments, or there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an ac‐ cident.◀ Storage possibility for small objects, for exam‐ ple, coins. Center armrest Front At a glance Located in the center armrest between the front seats is a storage compartment and de‐ pending on how the vehicle is equipped also an elastic band on the left side and a cover for the mobile phone holder or the snap-in adapter. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 183 Controls Storage compartments Opening Opening 1. Pull on the loop and fold down the center armrest. Push the cover down slightly and press the button, see arrow. The respective cover folds up. 2. Pull the handle. Closing Fold the respective cover down until it latches. Connection for an external audio device Closing Press cover down until it latches. Glasses compartment . Description, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication. At a glance The glasses compartment is located between the interior mirror and interior lamps. Rear At a glance A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats. 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Storage compartments Controls Opening Slide the cover forward. Press the button. Closing Press the cover up until it latches. Cupholders Hints Shatter-proof containers and no hot drinks Use light and shatter-proof containers and do not transport hot drinks. Otherwise, there is the increased danger of injury in an accident.◀ Unsuitable containers Do not forcefully push unsuitable con‐ tainers into the cupholders. This may result in damage.◀ Two cupholders are located in the center con‐ sole. Rear Note Pushing back the covers Push back the covers before folding up the center armrest; otherwise, the cupholder could become damaged.◀ Front At a glance At a glance In the center armrest. In the center console. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 185 Controls Storage compartments Clothes hooks Opening 1. Pull on the loop and fold down the center armrest. The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear. Do not obstruct view When suspending clothing from the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driv‐ er's vision.◀ No heavy objects Do not hang heavy objects from the hooks; otherwise, they may present a danger to passengers during braking and evasive ma‐ neuvers.◀ 2. Press the button. Storage compartments in the cargo area Storage space under the cargo floor cover Closing Press both covers inward back against each other. Third row of seats At a glance The drink holder is located between the seats of third row of seats. Raise the cargo floor panel. The storage space under the cargo floor panel is subdivided. Hooks/multi-function hook 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Storage compartments Controls Retaining strap A retaining strap is available on the right side trim for fastening small objects. Net Smaller objects can be stored in the net on the left side of the cargo area. Storage compartment on the right side A waterproof storage compartment is available on the right side of the cargo area floor. Left side storage compartment Pull the handle. Lashing eyes in the cargo area To secure the cargo, refer to page 195, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area. Lashing eyes in the cargo area with rail To secure the cargo, refer to page 195, there are lashing eyes in the cargo area. Cargo net, FlexNet To secure the cargo, refer to page 195, the flexible cargo net can also be used. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 187 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving tips This chapter provides you with information useful in dealing with specific driving and operating modes. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Things to remember when driving Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Breaking-in period General information Moving parts need to be broken in to adjust to each other. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of ap‐ prox. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake discs and brake pads. Drive moderately during this break-in period. Following part replacement The same breaking in procedures should be observed if any of the components mentioned above have to be renewed in the course of the vehicle's operating life. The following instructions will help achieve a long vehicle life and good economy. General driving notes Engine and differential Closing the tailgate Always obey the official speed limit. Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. ▷ For diesel engine 3,500 rpm and 93 mph/150 km/h. Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐ stances. Drive with the tailgate closed Only drive with the tailgate closed; other‐ wise, in the event of an accident or braking and evasive maneuvers, passengers and other road users may be injured, and the vehicle may be damaged. In addition, exhaust fumes may en‐ ter the passenger compartment.◀ If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ▷ Greatly increase the blower speed. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km ▷ Drive moderately. The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Hot exhaust system Hot exhaust system Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breakingin period. 190 High temperatures are generated in the exhaust system. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Things to remember when driving Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that flammable materials, e. g. hay, leaves, grass, etc. do not come in contact with the hot exhaust system during driving, while in idle po‐ sition mode, or when parked. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of seri‐ ous personal injury as well as property dam‐ age. Do not touch hot exhaust pipes; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.◀ Diesel particulate filter The diesel particulate filter collects soot parti‐ cles and burns them periodically at high tem‐ peratures. During the cleaning time of several minutes, the following may occur: ▷ Temporarily, the engine may run less smoothly. ▷ Noises and a slight amount of smoke com‐ ing from the exhaust until shortly after the engine is shut down. ▷ A somewhat higher engine speed is neces‐ sary to achieve the accustomed perform‐ ance. Climate control windshield Driving tips Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Mobile communication devices in the ve‐ hicle It is advised that you do not use mobile com‐ munication devices, e.g., mobile phones, in‐ side the vehicle without connecting them di‐ rectly to the external antenna. Otherwise, the vehicle electronics and mobile communication devices can interfere with each other. In addi‐ tion, there is no assurance that the radiation generated during transmission will be dis‐ charged from the vehicle interior.◀ Hydroplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, re‐ duce your speed to prevent hydroplaning.◀ Driving through water For calm water, maximum water depth: ▷ X5: 19.6 inches/50 cm At this max. depth, drive at walking speed. Adhere to water depth and speed limita‐ tions The marked area is not covered with heat re‐ flective coating. Use this area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, etc. Do not exceed this water depth and walking speed; otherwise, the vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged. If the vehicle has parked-car heating, drive through water only if it is not deeper than 9.8 inches/25 cm, and at this height no faster than walking speed.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 191 Driving tips Things to remember when driving Braking safely Hills Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐ ard feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most effective way of braking in situations when this is neces‐ sary. Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear in which the least braking is required. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat, re‐ sulting in a reduction in the brake system effi‐ ciency. The vehicle maintains steering responsive‐ ness. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if necessary. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its active mode. Objects within the range of movement of the pedals No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Avoid load on the brakes Avoid placing excessive load on the brake system. Light but consistent brake pres‐ sure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.◀ Do not drive in neutral Do not drive in neutral or with the engine stopped, as doing so disables engine braking. In addition, steering and brake assist are un‐ available with the engine stopped.◀ Brake disc corrosion The corrosion on the brake discs and the con‐ tamination on the brake pads are furthered by: Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. ▷ Low mileage. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, for example.◀ ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. Driving in wet conditions Corrosion occurs when the minimum pressure that must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the discs is not reached. When roads are wet coated with road salt or there is heavy rain, briefly exert gentle pres‐ sure on the brake pedal every few miles. Should corrosion form on the brake discs, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating ef‐ fect that generally cannot be corrected. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the brake discs and pads. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. 192 Condensation under the parked vehicle When using the automatic climate control, condensation water develops that exits under‐ neath the vehicle. Traces of water under the vehicle like this are normal. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Things to remember when driving Driving tips Driving on poor roads The vehicle connects four wheel drive to the advantages of a normal truck Do not drive on unpaved terrain Do not drive on unpaved terrain; other‐ wise, the vehicle may be damaged.◀ For your own safety, for the safety of passen‐ gers and of the vehicle, heed the following points: ▷ Become familiar with the vehicle before starting a trip; do not take risks in driving. ▷ Adjust the speed to the road surface con‐ ditions. The steeper and more uneven the road surface, the slower the speed should be. ▷ When driving on steep uphill or downhill grades: add engine oil and coolant up to near the MAX mark. Uphill and downhill grades can be traveled up to no more than 50 %. ▷ On steep downhill grades, use Hill Descent Control HDC, refer to page 133. Starting out is possible on uphill grades up to 33 %. The permissible side tilt is 50 %. ▷ Avoid contact of the bottom of the body with the ground. The ground clearance is no more than 7.8 inches/20 cm and can vary according to the loading condition. ▷ When wheels continue to turn, depress the accelerator so that driving stability control systems can distribute the driving force to the wheels. Activate DTC Dynamic Trac‐ tion Control if available. After a trip on poor roads After a trip on poor roads, check wheels and tires for damage to maintain driving safety. Clear heavy soiling from the body. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 193 Driving tips Loading Loading Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. General information Overloading the vehicle To avoid exceeding the approved carry‐ ing capacity of the tires, never overload the ve‐ hicle. Overloading can lead to overheating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. This could result in a sudden loss of tire inflation pressure.◀ No fluids in the trunk Make sure that fluids do not leak into the trunk; otherwise, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged.◀ Determining the load limit 1. Locate the following statement on your ve‐ hicle’s placard: ▷ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, damage to the 194 vehicle and unstable driving situations may result. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY pounds. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐ pacity. For example, if the YYY amount equals 1,000 lbs and there will be four 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 400 lbs: 1,000 lbs minus 600 lbs = 400 lbs. 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Loading Load Driving tips Securing cargo Lashing eyes in the cargo area The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Stowing cargo To secure the cargo there are four lashing eyes in the cargo area. Lashing eyes in the cargo area with rails ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests to stow cargo. To secure the cargo, there are four movable lashing eyes in the cargo area. ▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of the backrests. To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐ row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at the new position. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 195 Driving tips Loading If available, the lashing eyes are located under the cargo floor cover in the cargo area. They can be inserted into the openings in the rails. Securing cargo Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle loads and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Smaller and lighter items: secure with re‐ taining straps or with a cargo net or draw straps. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. ▷ Larger and heavy objects: secure with cargo straps. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bottom. Cargo straps, cargo netting, retaining straps or draw straps on the lashing eyes in the cargo area. Securing cargo Always position and secure the cargo as described above; otherwise, it can endanger the car's occupants if sudden braking or swerving becomes necessary. ▷ The roof load should not be too large in area. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, e.g., tie with ratchet straps. ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the tailgate. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐ ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Heavy or hard objects should not be carried loose inside the car; otherwise, they could be thrown around as a result of hard braking, sud‐ den swerves, etc., and endanger the occu‐ pants.◀ Roof-mounted luggage rack Note Installation only possible with roof rack. Roof racks are available as special accessories. Securing Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack. Loading Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major ef‐ fect on vehicle handling and steering re‐ sponse. 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Saving fuel Driving tips Saving fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. General information Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ ferent factors. The implementation of certain measures, driv‐ ing style and regular maintenance can have an influence on fuel consumption and on the envi‐ ronmental impact. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Remove attached parts following use Remove auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks which are no longer required following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐ dynamics and increase the fuel consumption. Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased air resistance and thereby reduces the range. Tires General information Tires can affect fuel consumption values in various ways, for instance fuel consumption can be influenced by the size of the tires. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Check and, if necessary, correct the tire infla‐ tion pressure at least twice a month and before starting on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Drive away immediately Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate engine speeds. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature. Look well ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐ cle driving ahead of you. Driving smoothly and looking ahead reduces fuel consumption. Use coasting When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 197 Driving tips Saving fuel On a downhill gradient, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle roll. The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting. Switch off the engine during longer stops Switch off the engine during longer stops, e.g., at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic congestion. Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of your vehicle automatically switches off the engine during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ onds of switching off the engine. Have maintenance carried out Have vehicles maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle economy and operating life. The maintenance should be carried out by your service center. Also note the BMW Maintenance System, refer to page 229. ECO PRO The concept ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐ gine control and comfort functions, e. g. the climate control output, are adjusted. In the instrument display, the extension of the range achieved by this can be displayed as a bonus range. Using this system can cause certain compo‐ nents of the vehicle to become worn prema‐ turely. At a glance In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ mined by other factors, such as driving style, road conditions, maintenance or environmental factors. ▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 199. The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and displays: ▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to page 199. Switch off any functions that are not currently needed Activate ECO PRO Functions such as seat heating and the rear window defroster require a lot of energy and reduce the range, especially in city and stopand-go traffic. cluster. Therefore, switch off these functions if they are not actually needed. Via the Driving Dynamics Control The ECO PRO driving program supports the energy conserving use of comfort functions. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. 198 Press button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument Configuring ECO PRO 1. Activate ECO PRO. 2. "Configure ECO PRO" 3. Configure the program. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Saving fuel Via the iDrive Driving tips Display in the instrument cluster 1. "Settings" ECO PRO bonus range 2. "ECO PRO mode" An extension of the range can be achieved by an adjusted driv‐ ing style. Or 1. "Settings" 2. "Driving mode" 3. "Configure ECO PRO" Configure the program. ECO PRO Tip This may be displayed as the bonus range in the instrument cluster. The bonus range is shown in the range display. The bonus range is automatically reset every time the vehicle is refueled. ▷ "Tip at:": Set ECO Pro speed at which an ECO PRO Tip is to be displayed. ECO PRO Tip - driving instruction ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning": The arrow indicates that the driving style can be adjusted to be more fuel efficient by backing off the accelerator for instance. A reminder is displayed if the set ECO PRO speed is exceeded. ECO PRO climate control "ECO PRO climate control" The climate control is adjusted to be fuel-effi‐ cient. By making a slight change to the set tempera‐ ture, or slowly adjusting the rate of heating or cooling of the passenger compartment, fuel consumption can be economized. The outputs of the seat heater and the exterior mirror heating are also reduced. The exterior mirror heating is made available when outside temperatures are very cold. ECO PRO potential The percentage of potential savings that can be achieved with the current configuration is displayed. Note The driving style display and ECO PRO tips in the instrument cluster appear when the ECO PRO display is activated. Activating driving style and ECO PRO tips: 1. "Settings" 2. "Info display" 3. "ECO PRO Info" ECO PRO tip - Symbols An additional symbol and a text instruction are displayed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 199 Driving tips Saving fuel Symbol Measure For efficient driving style, back off the accelerator or delay accelerating to allow time to assess road condi‐ tions. Reduce speed to the selected ECO PRO speed. Automatic transmission: switch from M/S to D and avoid manual shift interventions. Indications on the Control Display sion when transmission position D is engaged. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce fuel consumption. Transmis‐ sion position D remains engaged. This driving condition is referred to as coast‐ ing. As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is depressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again. Hints Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO, re‐ fer to page 198, driving mode. EfficientDynamics Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics Control. Information on fuel consumption and technol‐ ogy can be displayed during driving. The function is available in a certain speed range. 1. "Vehicle Info" A forward-looking driving style helps the driver to use the function as often as possible and supports the fuel-conserving effect of coast‐ ing. 2. "EfficientDynamics" Displaying EfficientDynamics info The current efficiency can be displayed. "EfficientDynamics info" Safety mode The following systems are displayed: The function is not available if one of the fol‐ lowing conditions is satisfied. ▷ Automatic engine start-stop function. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Climate control output. ▷ Coasting. Display ECO PRO tips ▷ Cruise control activated. "ECO PRO Tips" The setting is stored for the profile currently in use. Coasting The concept The system helps to conserve fuel. To do this, under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐ 200 ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing exces‐ sive current. Functional requirements In ECO PRO mode, this function is available in a speed range from approximately 30 mph, ap‐ prox. 50 km/h to 100 mph, approx. 160 km/h, if the following conditions are satisfied: ▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are not operated. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Saving fuel Driving tips ▷ The selector lever is in transmission posi‐ tion D. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. Display Indications on the Control Display The Coasting driving condition is displayed in EfficientDynamics Info while this driving mode is active. Color code blue, arrow 1, and symbol, arrow 2: driving condition Coasting. Displaying EfficientDynamics info 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "EfficientDynamics" 3. "EfficientDynamics info" Deactivating the system manually The function can be deactivated in the Config‐ ure ECO PRO, refer to page 198, menu, e.g., to use the braking effect of the engine when trav‐ eling downhill. The setting is stored for the profile currently in use. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 201 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Mobility In order to always ensure your mobility, you will find important information on operating fluids, wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside Assistance in the following. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Mobility Refueling Refueling Vehicle equipment 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Hints 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Refuel promptly Refuel no later than at a range of 30 miles/50 km, or operation of the engine is not ensured and damage may occur.◀ Diesel engines The filler neck is designed for refueling at die‐ sel fuel pumps. Fuel cap Closing Opening 1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler flap. 2. Close the fuel filler flap. Do not pinch the retaining strap Do not pinch the retaining strap attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed properly and fuel vapors can escape.◀ Manually unlocking fuel filler flap In the event of an electrical malfunction, for ex‐ ample. 204 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Refueling Mobility 1. Open the cover on the right side trim. 2. Pull the green knob with the fuel pump symbol. This releases the fuel filler flap. Observe the following when refueling The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Do not overfill the fuel tank Do not overfill the fuel tank; otherwise fuel may escape, causing harm to the environ‐ ment and damaging the vehicle.◀ Handling fuels Obey safety regulations posted at the gas station.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 205 Mobility Fuel Fuel Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Fuel recommendation xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum Ethanol proportion Do not refuel with Ethanol above the maximum Ethanol proportion, that is, refueling with fuel that contains more than 10 % Ethanol, flex fuel or other alcohols; otherwise, damage to the engine and fuel supply could result.◀ Gasoline quality BMW recommends AKI 91. Note Minimum fuel grade General fuel quality Even fuels that conform to the specifica‐ tions can be of low quality. Switch gas stations or use fuel from brand name producers having a higher octane level; otherwise, engine prob‐ lems, such as poor engine starting perform‐ ance, poorer handling characteristics or driving performance may occur.◀ Gasoline For the best fuel economy, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. Refuel only with unleaded gasoline with‐ out metallic additives. Do not refuel with any leaded gasoline or gaso‐ line with metallic additives, e. g. manganese or iron, or permanent damage to the catalytic converter and other components.◀ Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. Ethanol should satisfy the following quality standards: BMW recommends AKI 89. Minimum fuel grade Do not use any gasoline below the mini‐ mum fuel grade as this may impair engine per‐ formance.◀ If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐ ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. Fuel quality The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐ tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐ ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐ ronmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to purchase gasoline from BP or Top Tier retail‐ ers. US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Fuel Mobility Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for unscheduled main‐ tenance.◀ Diesel Low-Sulfur Diesel The engine of your BMW is designed for diesel with low sulfur content: Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel ASTM D 975-xx. xx: comply with the current standard in each case. Use only Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel. The fraction of biodiesel in the fuel must not exceed 5 %, referred to as B5. Do not use gasoline. If you do fill the tank with the wrong fuel, e.g., gasoline, do not start the engine as this may damage the engine.◀ After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐ ice center or roadside assistance. If the fuel pump nozzle does not fit in the filler pipe of your BMW, please check to ensure that you are refueling at a diesel fuel pump that is equipped with a diesel fuel pump nozzle. In the event the Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel fuel cannot be fully inserted into the fuel filler neck, please contact BMW Roadside Assistance for instructions on how to add fuel. For more infor‐ mation on BMW Roadside Assistance, refer to page 240. BMW Advanced Diesel The concept BMW Advanced Diesel reduces nitrogen ox‐ ides in the diesel emissions by injecting diesel exhaust fluid reducing agent into the exhaust system. A chemical reaction takes place inside the catalytic converter that minimizes nitrogen oxides. The vehicle has two tanks, the active tank and the passive tank. The active tank can be refil‐ led in the engine compartment. The passive tank is refilled by the service center. To be able to start the engine as usual, there must be an adequate reducing agent. Warming up the system In order to warm the engine up to its operating temperature after a cold start, the automatic transmission may subsequently shift up to the next higher gear. Displays in the instrument cluster Winter diesel To ensure that the diesel engine remains op‐ erational in the winter, use winter diesel. It is available at gas stations during winter months. The fuel filter heating system, included as a standard feature, prevents disruption of the fuel supply while driving. Do not add any diesel additives Reserve display This display in the instrument cluster provides information about the distance that can still be driven with the current reserve level. The reserve indication is dis‐ played starting at approx. 600 miles/1,000 km remaining range. Do not add additives, including gasoline; otherwise, engine damage may occur.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 207 Mobility Fuel Refill in good time The reducing agent must be replenished as soon as the Reserve display appears, other‐ wise the engine cannot be restarted.◀ Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum The engine will continue to run even when the display shows --, as long as it is not switched off and all other operating condi‐ tions are satisfied, sufficient fuel for example. Engine does not start Do not continue driving to the limit of the remaining travel distance. Otherwise, you will not be able to restart the engine after switch‐ ing it off.◀ Filling with incorrect fuel A Check Control message is displayed when the tank is filled with the incorrect fuel. After adding the wrong fuel, contact your serv‐ ice center. System defect A Check Control message is displayed when there is a system defect. Have the diesel exhaust fluid replenished The reducing agent is added by the service center within the context of regular mainte‐ nance. Provided you observe this maintenance schedule, it is normally necessary to replenish the fluid once between maintenance appoint‐ ments. It may be necessary to have the fluid replen‐ ished several times under particular circum‐ stances, for example, if the vehicle is driven in a particularly sporty style or if it is driven at high altitudes. 208 The reducing agent must be replenished as soon as the reserve display appears in the in‐ strument cluster to avoid not being able to re‐ start the engine. Diesel exhaust fluid at low temperatures Due to its physical properties, it is possible that reducing agent may also need to be re‐ plenished between regular maintenance ap‐ pointments if it is exposed to temperatures be‐ low + 23 ℉/- 5 ℃. In this case, add reducing agent only immediately before starting to drive. The need to replenish it is indicated by the Re‐ serve display in the instrument cluster. At temperatures below + 12 ℉/- 11 ℃ the fill level in some cases cannot be measured. After adding reducing agent, the reserve dis‐ play is displayed only until the fill level can be measured again. Replenishing Diesel exhaust fluid yourself in exceptional cases You can replenish reducing agent yourself in exceptional cases, e.g., to get to the service center. Avoid contact with Diesel exhaust fluid Do not come into contact with the reduc‐ ing agent. Otherwise, skin or eye irritations may result.◀ Handling Diesel exhaust fluid When working with reducing agent in closed spaces, ensure good ventilation. When the bottle or container is opened, acrid smell‐ ing fumes may escape.◀ Keeping Diesel exhaust fluid out of reach of children Keep reducing agent out of reach of children◀ Avoid contact with surfaces Avoid contact of reducing agent with sur‐ faces of the vehicle. Damage could result.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Fuel Suitable Diesel exhaust fluid ▷ Preferred: BMW Diesel Exhaust Fluid. With this bottle and its special adapter, Diesel exhaust fluid can be replenished simply and safely. Mobility 4. Press the bottle down, see arrow. The vehicle container will be filled. The container is full when the fill level in the bottle no longer changes. It is not pos‐ sible to overfill. ▷ Alternative: NOx reduction agent AUS 32 Diesel exhaust fluid can be purchased at your Service Center. Refill quantity When the Reserve display starts, add at least 2 bottles of reducing agent. This corresponds to approx. 1 gallon. Tank for reducing agent The tank for the reducing agent is located in the engine compartment. 5. Pull back the bottle, see arrow, and un‐ screw it. 6. Replace the fuel cap and turn it clockwise. 7. Close the hood. Adding 1. Open the hood, refer to page 222. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise and re‐ move. 3. Place the bottle on it and turn it as far as it will go, see arrow. After adding Diesel exhaust fluid Note Incorrect fluids After filling with incorrect fluids, such as antifreeze for washer water, do not start the engine, otherwise there is risk of fire.◀ Contact your service center. Disposing of bottles You take your empty Diesel exhaust fluid bottles to your Service Center for disposal. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 209 Mobility Fuel Do not dispose of empty bottles with house‐ hold waste unless this is permitted by local regulations. Reserve display The Reserve display will still ap‐ pear along with the remaining range after refilling. Engine can be started. After several minutes of driving, the Reserve indication goes out. Diesel exhaust fluid on minimum After filling, the indication -- is still displayed. Only after the display goes out can the engine -- be started. 1. Switch on the ignition. Display -- goes out after approx. 1 minute. 2. Engine can be started. 210 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Wheels and tires Mobility Wheels and tires Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Tire inflation pressure Safety information The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐ sure influence the following: than 1.25 miles/2 km or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. After correcting the tire inflation pressure: ▷ Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. ▷ Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor. Pressure specifications The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 212, contains all pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient tem‐ perature. Pressure specifications apply to ap‐ proved tire sizes and recommended tire brands. This information can be obtained from your service center. ▷ The service life of the tires. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: ▷ Road safety. ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Driving comfort. ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed. Checking the pressure Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h Tires have a natural, consistent loss of pres‐ sure. Check the tire inflation pressure regularly Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ sure, and correct it as needed: at least twice a month and before a long trip. If you fail to ob‐ serve this precaution, you may be driving on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condition that may not only compromise your vehicle's driving stability, but also lead to tire damage and the risk of an accident.◀ Tires heat up during driving, and the tire infla‐ tion pressure increases along with the temper‐ ature of the tire. The tire inflation pressure specifications relate to cold tires or tires with the ambient temperature. Only check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after driving no more For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 212, and adjust as necessary. These pressure values can also be found on the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's door pillar. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 211 Mobility Wheels and tires Maximum permissible speed Do not exceed 100 mph/160 km/h; other‐ wise, tire damage and accidents may result.◀ Tire inflation pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h X5 sDrive35i/X5 xDrive35i/ X5 xDrive50i/X5 xDrive35d with two rows of seats Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.3 / 33 2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.5 / 36 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 T 155/80 R 19 114 M X5 sDrive35i/X5 xDrive35i/ X5 xDrive50i/X5 xDrive35d with three rows of seats 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC Tire size Tire size Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.5 / 36 - - 2.8 / 41 Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC 2.8 / 41 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39 2.4 / 35 2.9 /42 2.4 / 35 - - 2.7 / 39 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 2.5 / 36 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC 212 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 275/40 R 20 2.4 / 35 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.4 / 35 - - 2.9 /42 2.7 / 39 Speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Other‐ wise tire damage and accidents could occur.◀ Tire inflation pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h X5 sDrive35i/X5 xDrive35i/ X5 xDrive35d with two rows of seats Without Sport Package Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 2.8 / 41 - - 3.0 / 44 Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 2.8 / 41 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.8 / 41 - - 3.2 / 46 3.0 / 44 Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 T 155/80 R 19 114 M With Sport Package Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC Tire size 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC Tire size Mobility 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 213 Mobility Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifica‐ tions in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.9 /42 - - 3.2 / 46 Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.7 / 39 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V XL RSC 2.9 /42 - - 3.2 / 46 2.9 /42 - - 3.4/ 49 Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V XL RSC Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC Compact wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 155/90 D 18 113 M Without Sport Package Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 214 2.7 / 39 - - 3.2 / 46 Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC With Sport Package Tire size 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC Pressure specifications in bar/PSI 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 2.9 /42 - - 3.2 / 46 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 3.0 / 44 Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires X5 sDrive35i/X5 xDrive35i/ X5 xDrive35d with three rows of seats 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC - 4.2 / 60 T 155/80 R 19 114 M Tire size Front: 275/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.9 /42 - - 3.4/ 49 Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 3.2 / 46 Wheels and tires X5 xDrive50i with two rows of seats Tire size Without Sport Package Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 255/55 R 18 109 H 2.9 /42 M+S XL RSC 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC 2.8 / 41 3.3 / 48 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 2.8 / 41 - - 3.0 / 44 Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 2.8 / 41 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC 2.8 / 41 - - 3.2 / 46 3.0 / 44 Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 YW XL RSC T 155/90 D 18 113 M T 155/80 R 19 114 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 3.4 / 49 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Compact wheel: Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Mobility Front: 275/40 R 20 106 V M+S XL RSC 2.9 /42 - - 3.4 / 49 2.9 /42 - - 3.4 / 49 2.9 /42 - - 3.2/ 46 Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC Front: 285/35 R 21 105 Y XL RSC Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 Y XL RSC Compact wheel: T 155/90 D 18 113 M Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h 4.2 / 60 T 155/80 R 19 114 M X5 xDrive50i with three rows of seats Without Sport Package With Sport Package Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 215 Mobility Tire size Wheels and tires Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL A/S RSC 2.5 / 36 3.0 / 44 2.7 / 39 3.2 / 46 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC Front: 275/40 R 20 106 W XL RSC 2.9 /42 - - 3.4 / 49 Front: 275/40 R 20 2.9 /42 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.9 /42 - - 3.2/ 46 2.7 / 39 - - 3.0 / 44 Front: 275/40 R 20 2.7 / 39 106 V M+S XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 V M+S XL RSC - Front: 285/35 R 21 105 W XL RSC 2.7 / 39 - - 3.2 / 46 3.0 / 44 Tire identification marks Tire size 245/45 R 18 96 Y 245: nominal width in mm 45: aspect ratio in % Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC R: radial tire code 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load rating, not for ZR tires Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Speed letter With Sport Package Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires Q = up to 100 mph, 160 km/h R = up to 106 mph, 170 km/h S = up to 112 mph, 180 km/h T = up to 118 mph, 190 km/h H = up to 131 mph, 210 km/h V = up to 150 mph, 240 km/h 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL RSC 216 3.4 / 49 Rear: 325/30 R 21 108 W XL RSC Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Rear: 315/35 R 20 110 W XL RSC 255/55 R 18 109 H M+S XL RSC 255/50 R 19 107 H M+S XL A/S RSC Tire size 2.9 /42 3.4 / 49 W = up to 167 mph, 270 km/h Y = up to 186 mph, 300 km/h Tire Identification Number DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 1013 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Wheels and tires Mobility xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand Traction xxx: tire size and tire design The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. 1013: tire age Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Tire age DOT … 1013: the tire was manufactured in the 10th week 2013. Recommendation Regardless of wear, replace tires at least every 6 years. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger car tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart signifi‐ cantly from the norm due to variations in driv‐ ing habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐ terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum re‐ quired by law. Temperature grade for this tire The temperature grade for this tire is es‐ tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. If necessary, have the vehicle towed.◀ RSC – Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 220, are labeled with a circular symbol containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 217 Mobility Wheels and tires M+S Notes Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and suspension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐ ioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped with low-profile tires. Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm. There is an increased danger of hydroplaning if the tread depth is less than 0.12 in/3 mm. Winter tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.16 in/4 mm. Below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm, tires are less suitable for winter operation. Minimum tread depth Indications of tire damage or other vehicle de‐ fects: ▷ Unusual vibrations during driving. ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐ dency to pull to the left or right. Damage can, e. g., be caused by driving over curbs, road damage, or similar things. In case of tire damage If there are indications of tire damage, re‐ duce your speed immediately and have the wheels and tires checked right away; other‐ wise, there is the increased risk of an accident. Drive carefully to the nearest service center. Have the vehicle towed or transported there. Otherwise, tire damage can become life threat‐ ening for vehicle occupants and also other road users.◀ Repair of tire damage Wear indicators are distributed around the tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ quired minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. They are marked on the side of the tire with TWI, Tread Wear Indicator. For safety reasons, the manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that you do not have damaged tires repaired; they should be re‐ placed. Otherwise, damage can occur as a re‐ sult.◀ Tire damage Changing wheels and tires General information Mounting Inspect your tires often for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. 218 Information on mounting tires Have mounting and balancing performed only by a service center. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Wheels and tires If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Mobility Recommended tire brands Wheel and tire combination You can ask the service center about the right wheel/tire combination and wheel rim versions for the vehicle. Incorrect wheel and tire combinations impair the function of a variety of systems such as ABS or DSC. To maintain good handling and vehicle re‐ sponse, use only tires with a single tread con‐ figuration from a single manufacturer. Following tire damage, have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible. Approved wheels and tires The manufacturer of your vehicle recom‐ mends that you use only wheels and tires that have been approved for your particular vehicle model. For example, despite having the same official size ratings, variations can lead to body con‐ tact and with it, the risk of severe accidents. The manufacturer of your vehicle cannot eval‐ uate non-approved wheels and tires to deter‐ mine if they are suited for use, and therefore cannot ensure the operating safety of the vehi‐ cle if they are mounted.◀ For each tire size, the manufacturer of your ve‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. These can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling. New tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full traction potential until after an initial breakingin period. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Retreaded tires The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Retreaded tires Possibly substantial variations in the de‐ sign and age of the tire casing structures can limit service life and have a negative impact on road safety.◀ Winter tires Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season M+S tires do provide better winter traction than summer tires, they do not provide the same level of per‐ formance as winter tires. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 219 Mobility Wheels and tires Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then display a corresponding sign in the field of vision. You can obtain this sign from the tire specialist or from your service center. Run-flat tires Label Maximum speed for winter tires Do not exceed the maximum speed for the respective winter tires; otherwise, tire dam‐ age and accidents can occur.◀ Run-flat tires If you are already using run-flat tires, for your own safety you should replace them only with the same kind. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Rotating wheels between axles The manufacturer of your vehicle advises against switching wheels between the front and rear axles. This can impair the handling characteristics. Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the side wall of the tire. RSC label on the tire sidewall. The wheels are composed of special rims and tires that are self-supporting, to a limited de‐ gree. The support of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a pressure loss. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 112. Continued driving with a damaged tire, refer to page 109. Changing run-flat tires For your own safety, only use run-flat tires. No spare tire is available in the case of a flat tire. Your service center will be glad to advise you. Snow chains Fine-link snow chains Only certain types of fine-link snow chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle, classified as road-safe and approved. Information about the approved snow chains are available from the service center. Use Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Wheels and tires Mobility ▷ 255/55 R 18. ▷ 255/50 R 19. Follow the chain manufacturer's instructions. Make sure that the snow chains are always sufficiently tight. Retighten as needed accord‐ ing to the chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not initialize the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting snow chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with snow chains, briefly activate Dynamic Traction Control if necessary. Maximum speed with snow chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using snow chains. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 221 Mobility Engine compartment Engine compartment Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Important features in the engine compartment 1 Washer fluid reservoir 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal 2 Vehicle identification number 6 Oil filler neck 3 Jump-starting, positive terminal 7 Container for reducing agent 4 Coolant reservoir Hood If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide‐ lines, have any work on the vehicle performed only by a service center. Opening the hood Working in the engine compartment Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without the necessary professional technical training. 222 If this work is not carried out properly, there is the danger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Engine compartment Never reach into the engine compart‐ ment Mobility Closing the hood Never reach into the intermediate spaces or gaps in the engine compartment. Otherwise, there is risk of injury, e.g., from rotating or hot parts.◀ 1. Pull the lever. Let the hood drop from a height of approx. 16 in/40 cm and push down on it to lock it fully. The hood must audibly engage on both sides. Hood open when driving 2. Press the release handle and open the hood. If you see any signs that the hood is not completely closed while driving, pull over im‐ mediately and close it securely.◀ Danger of pinching Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may result.◀ 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood. Danger of injury when the hood is open There is a danger of injury from protrud‐ ing parts when the hood is open.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 223 Mobility Engine oil Engine oil Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. trip, the status of the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed. With frequent short-distance trips, regularly perform a detailed measurement. Displaying the oil level 1. "Vehicle Info" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on the driving style and driving conditions. When a sporty driving style is used, the engine oil consumption, for example, is clearly higher. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level after refueling. The vehicle is equipped with electronic oil measurement. The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐ uring principles. ▷ Status display ▷ Detailed measurement Checking the oil level electronically Status display Oil level display messages Different messages appear on the display de‐ pending on the oil level. Pay attention to these messages. If the engine oil level is too low, within the next 125 miles/200 km Add oil, refer to page 225. Engine oil level too low Add oil immediately; otherwise, an insuf‐ ficient amount of engine oil could result in en‐ gine damage.◀ Take care not to add too much engine oil. Too much engine oil Have the vehicle checked immediately; otherwise, surplus oil can lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Detailed measurement The concept The concept The oil level is monitored electronically during driving and shown on the Control Display. If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. In the detailed measurement the oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Gasoline engine: If the oil level reaches the minimum level, a check control message is displayed. Diesel engine: Requirements A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of driving. During a shorter 224 "Engine oil level" If the oil level reaches the minimum level or an overfilling is detected, a check control mes‐ sage is displayed. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Engine oil During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat. Mobility After refilling, perform a detailed measure‐ ment, refer to page 224. Adding oil Requirements ▷ Vehicle is on level road. ▷ Automatic transmission: selector lever in transmission position N or P and accelera‐ tor pedal not depressed. ▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ perature. Performing a detailed measurement In order to perform a detailed measurement of the engine oil level: 1. "Vehicle Info" Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km. Otherwise, the engine may be damaged.◀ Do not add too much engine oil When too much engine oil is added, im‐ mediately have the vehicle checked, otherwise, this may cause engine damage.◀ Protect children Keep oil, grease, etc., out of reach of chil‐ dren and heed the warnings on the containers to prevent health risks.◀ 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Measure engine oil level" 4. "Start measurement" Oil types for refilling The oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Hints Duration: approx. 1 minute. Oil additives may lead to engine dam‐ age.◀ Adding engine oil Viscosity grades for engine oils General information Switch off the ignition and safely park the vehi‐ cle before engine oil is added. Filler neck No oil additives When selecting an engine oil, ensure that the engine oil belongs to one of the viscosity grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40, and SAE 5W-30 or malfunctions or engine damage may occur.◀ The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the engine. Some types of oils in some cases are not avail‐ able in all countries. Approved oil types Gasoline engine BMW Longlife-01. Only replenish the maximum oil amount of 1 US quart/liter if the signal is displayed in the instrument cluster. BMW Longlife-01 FE. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 225 Mobility Engine oil Diesel engine BMW Longlife-04. Additional information about the approved types of oils can be requested from the service center. Alternative oil types If the approved engine oils are not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an oil with the following specification can be added: Gasoline engine API SM or superior grade specification. Diesel engine API ILSAC GF-5. Engine oil change The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends having the engine oil changed by your service center. 226 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Coolant Mobility Coolant Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Hints Danger of burns from hot engine Do not open the cooling system while the engine is hot; otherwise, escaping coolant may cause burns.◀ cess pressure to dissipate, and then open it. 3. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐ tween the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck. Suitable additives Only use suitable additives; otherwise, engine damage may occur. The additives are harmful to your health.◀ Coolant consists of water and additives. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for the vehicle. Information about the suitable additives are available from the service center. Coolant level If there is no Min. and Max. mark in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir, have the coolant level checked if necessary by your service cen‐ ter and add coolant as needed. Filling 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐ cess pressure to dissipate, and then open it. Checking 1. Let the engine cool. 2. Turn the cap of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any ex‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 227 Mobility Coolant 3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 4. Turn the cap until there is an audible click. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and the cap must point towards one another. 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐ nated as soon as possible. Disposal Comply with the relevant environmen‐ tal protection regulations when dispos‐ ing of coolant and coolant additives. 228 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Maintenance Mobility Maintenance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. BMW maintenance system The maintenance system indicates required maintenance measures, and thereby provides support in maintaining road safety and the op‐ erational reliability of the vehicle. Condition Based Service CBS Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ count the driving conditions of your vehicle. Based on this, Condition Based Service deter‐ mines the maintenance requirements. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance you need to your user profile. Details on the service requirements, refer to page 90, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐ play. Service data in the remote control Information on the required maintenance is continuously stored in the remote control. Your service center will read out this data and suggest the right array of service procedures for your vehicle. Therefore, hand your service specialist the re‐ mote control with which the vehicle was driven most recently. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐ tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐ count. If this occurs, have a service center update the time-dependent maintenance procedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter. Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐ formation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els for additional information on service re‐ quirements. Maintenance and repair should be performed by your service center. Make sure to have reg‐ ular maintenance procedures recorded in the vehicle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models, and in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐ els. These entries are proof of regular mainte‐ nance. Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis Note Socket for Onboard Diagnosis The socket for onboard diagnostics may only be used by the service center or a work‐ shop that operates in accordance with the specifications of the vehicle manufacturer with Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 229 Mobility Maintenance correspondingly trained personnel and other authorized persons. Otherwise, use may result in operating problems for the vehicle.◀ Position There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for checking the primary components in the vehi‐ cle emissions. Emissions ▷ The warning lamp lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. Canadian model: warning light indi‐ cates the engine symbol. ▷ The warning lamp flashes under certain circumstances: This indicates that there is excessive mis‐ firing in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the system checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐ riod can seriously damage emission con‐ trol components, in particular the catalytic converter. 230 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Replacing components Mobility Replacing components Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Onboard vehicle tool kit 1. Raise the cargo floor panel. Wiper blade replacement Hints Do not fold down the wipers without wiper blades Do not fold down the wipers if wiper blades have not been installed; this may damage the windshield.◀ Folding down wipers before opening the hood Before opening the hood, ensure that the wiper arms with the wiper blades are against the windshield to prevent damage.◀ Front: Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up, refer to page 77, the wiper arms. 2. Lift the wiper all the way off of the wind‐ shield. 2. Remove the onboard vehicle tool kit. 3. Fold open the holder. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 231 Mobility Replacing components 4. Slide wiper blade out of the wiper arm. You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs at the service center. Danger of burns Only change bulbs when they are cool; otherwise, there is the danger of getting burned.◀ Working on the lighting system 5. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on until it you hear it snap into the holder. 6. Fold down the wipers. Rear: replacing the wiper blades 1. Lift off the wiper fully and pull off the wiper blade, arrow. When working on the lighting system, you should always switch off the lights af‐ fected to prevent short circuits. To avoid possible injury or equipment damage when replacing bulbs, observe any instructions provided by the bulb manufacturer.◀ Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ Do not touch the bulbs 2. Attach a new wiper blade. It must engage audibly. 3. Fold down the wipers. Lamp and bulb replacement Hints Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu‐ tion to vehicle safety. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to the service center if you are unfamiliar with them or they are not described here. 232 Do not touch the glass of new bulbs with your bare hands, as even minute amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold the bulb by its base.◀ Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Light-emitting diodes installed behind a cover serve as the light source for controls, display elements and other equipment. These light-emitting diodes, which are related to conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. Do not remove the covers Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several hours; otherwise, irritation of the retina could result.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Replacing components Headlamp glass Mobility At a glance Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐ ternal lamps in cool or humid weather. When driving with the light switched on, the conden‐ sation evaporates after a short time. The head‐ lamp glasses do not need to be changed. If the headlamps do not dim despite driving with the light switched on, increasing humidity forms, e. g. water droplets in the light, have the service center check this. Headlamp setting The headlamp adjustments can be affected by changing lamps and bulbs. Therefore after a change, have the headlamp setting checked and corrected by Service. 1 Parking lamps / daytime running lights 2 Low beams/high beams/headlamp flasher 3 Turn signal Xenon headlamps Front lamps, bulb replacement Low beams and high beams are designed with xenon technology. Xenon headlamps The parking lamps and daylight running lights are made using LED technology. Hints Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Because of the long life of these bulbs, the likelihood of failure is very low. Switching the lamps on and off frequently shortens their life. If a bulb fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Do not perform work/bulb replacement on xenon headlamps Have any work on the xenon lighting system, including bulb replacement, performed only by a service center. Due to the high voltage present in the system, there is the danger of fatal injuries if work is carried out improperly.◀ For checking and adjusting headlamp aim, please contact your BMW center. LED headlamps Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 232. With LED headlamps, all front lamps and side indicators are designed with LED technology. If an LED fails, switch on the front fog lamps and continue the trip with great care. Comply with local regulations. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Front fog lamps/cornering lamps Note Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 232. 55-watt bulb, H11. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 233 Mobility Replacing components Replacement 5. Turn the bulb bracket and remove it. 1. Insert the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle tool kit, with the flat side facing out‐ ward, past the removal hook and onto the clip, arrow 1. 6. Remove the bulb and replace it. 7. Proceed in reverse order to insert the front fog lamp. Note the guide rails in doing so. 2. Turn the screwdriver by 90°, arrow 2. LED front fog lamps 3. Press the removal hook upward, arrow, and remove the front fog lamp from the front using the hook. Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 232. These front fog lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Turn signal Note Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 232. 4. Detach the connector. The turn signals are located next to each low beam in the engine compartment. 21-watt bulb, PY 21W. Replacement 1. Opening the hood, refer to page 222 2. Unscrew the cap counterclockwise and re‐ move it carefully. 234 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Replacing components The bulb is attached to the cap. 3. Turn the bulb clockwise to remove it. 4. Insert the new bulb and attach the cover in the reverse order. Mobility Jacking points for the vehicle jack The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the positions shown. Compact wheel Lateral turn signals Follow the general instructions on Lamps and bulbs, refer to page 232. These lamps are made using LED technology. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. Tail lamps, bulb replacement LED tail lamps Hints Safety measures in case of a breakdown or a wheel change ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Switch on the hazard warning system. ▷ Set the parking brake and engage trans‐ mission position P. These tail lamps are made using LED technol‐ ogy. Contact your service center in the event of a malfunction. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐ side the immediate area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. Changing wheels ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or portable hazard warning lamp at an appro‐ priate distance. Comply with all safety guidelines and regulations. Hints With three rows of seats, the vehicle equip‐ ment does not include a spare tire. When using run-flat tires or tire sealants, a tire does not need to be changed immediately in the event of pressure loss due to a flat tire. The tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from your service center. ▷ Perform wheel change only on a flat, solid and slip-resistant surface. On soft or slip‐ pery ground, e.g., snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle or vehicle jack can slip away to the side. ▷ Do not place wood blocks or similar items under the vehicle jack; otherwise, it cannot reach its carrying capacity because of the restricted height. ▷ If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not start the engine; other‐ wise, a mortal hazard exists.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 235 Mobility Replacing components Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheels Use the vehicle jack only for changing wheels Do not attempt to use it to jack up a different type of vehicle or loads of any kind; otherwise, this could cause material damage and personal injury.◀ At a glance The compact wheel and the tools are located in the cargo area under the cargo floor cover. 1 Compact wheel 2 Vehicle jack 3 Vehicle jack crank 4 Wheel lug wrench Prepare wheel change 1. Follow the Safety instructions, refer to page 235. 2. Loosen the wheel lug bolts a half turn. Jacking up the vehicle 1. Place the vehicle jack at the jacking point closest to the wheel such that the vehicle jack foot is vertically beneath the vehicle jacking point with the entire surface on the ground. 2. Insert the vehicle jack head in the rectan‐ gular recess of the jacking point for crank‐ ing it up. 3. Crank it up until the wheel in question lifts off of the ground. Remove compact wheel Wheel mounting 1. Unscrew the wheel lug bolts and remove the wheel. 2. Put the new wheel or compact wheel on and screw in at least two bolts. If original BMW light alloy wheels are not mounted, any accompanying lug bolts also have to be used. 3. Screw in the remaining the lug bolts and tighten all bolts well in a crosswise pattern. 1. Remove tool holder. 2. Unscrew the wing nut 1. 3. Remove the washer 2 to the side. 4. Remove compact wheel. 4. Lower the vehicle and remove the vehicle jack. After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐ ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm. 236 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Replacing components Check for secure seating of the lug bolts For safety reasons, have the secure seat‐ ing of the lug bolts checked with a cali‐ brated torque wrench; otherwise, a safety hazard results from incorrectly tightened lug bolts.◀ 2. Stow the defective wheel in the cargo area. The defective wheel cannot be stored un‐ der the cargo floor cover because of its size. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 111. Reinitialize the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 108. 5. Replace the damaged tires as soon as pos‐ sible. Driving with the compact wheel Watch the speed when driving with the compact wheel Drive conservatively and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h; otherwise, changed driving characteristics such as reduced lane stability while braking, extended braking dis‐ tance and changed self-steering properties in the limit area.◀ Mounting only one compact wheel Only a single compact wheel may be mounted. Reinstall wheels and tires of the original size as quickly as possible; otherwise, there is a safety risk.◀ Vehicle battery Maintenance Mobility Your service center will be glad to advise you on questions regarding the battery. Battery replacement Use approved vehicle batteries only Only use vehicle batteries that have been approved for your vehicle by the manufacturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged and systems or functions may not be fully availa‐ ble.◀ After a battery replacement, have the battery registered on the vehicle by your service cen‐ ter to ensure that all comfort functions are fully available and that any Check Control mes‐ sages of these comfort functions are no longer displayed. Charging the battery Note Do not plug chargers into the socket Do not connect battery chargers to the factory-installed sockets in the vehicle as this may damage the battery.◀ General information Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ ciently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐ lowing cases: ▷ When making frequent short-distance drives. ▷ If the vehicle is not used for prolonged pe‐ riods, longer than a month. Starting aid terminals In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the starting aid terminals, refer to page 241, in the engine compartment with the engine off. The battery is maintenance-free. The added amount of acid is sufficient for the service life of the battery. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 237 Mobility Replacing components Power failure In the passenger compartment After a temporary power loss, some equipment needs to be reinitialized. Individual settings need to be reprogrammed: ▷ Time: update. ▷ Date: update. ▷ Navigation system: wait for the operability of the navigation. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by your service center or bring them to a recy‐ cling center. Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover. In the cargo area Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. Fuses Hints Open the cover on the right side trim. Replacing fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and do not replace a defective fuse with a substi‐ tute of another color or amperage rating; this could lead to a circuit overload, ultimately re‐ sulting in a fire in the vehicle.◀ Information on the fuse types and locations is found on a separate sheet. Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse types and locations are stored in the fuse box in the cargo area. 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Breakdown assistance Mobility Breakdown assistance Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Hints Emergency Request not guaranteed For technical reasons, the Emergency Request cannot be guaranteed under unfavor‐ able conditions.◀ Initiating an Emergency Request Hazard warning flashers 1. Press the cover briefly to open it. 2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the button lights up. The button is located in the center console. Intelligent Emergency Request Requirements ▷ The radio ready state is switched on. ▷ The Assist system is functional. ▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has been activated. General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. ▷ The LED lights up: an Emergency Request was initiated. If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been estab‐ lished. ▷ The LED flashes when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ lished. When the emergency request is received at the BMW Response Center, the BMW Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circum‐ stances. For this purpose, data that are used to de‐ termine the necessary rescue measures, such as the current position of the vehicle Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 239 Mobility Breakdown assistance if it can be established, are transmitted to the BMW Response Center. ▷ If the LED is flashing, but the BMW Re‐ sponse Center can no longer be heard via the speaker, you can nevertheless still be heard for the BMW Response Center. Check the expiration dates of the contents regularly and replace any expired items promptly. Storage 1. Open the cover on the left side trim. Initiating an Emergency Request automatically Under certain conditions, an Emergency Re‐ quest is automatically initiated immediately af‐ ter a severe accident. Automatic Collision Noti‐ fication is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Warning triangle 2. Remove the first aid kit. 1. Open the cover on the left side trim. 2. To remove, loosen the bracket. Roadside Assistance Service availability Roadside Assistance can be reached around the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐ sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ down. Roadside Assistance The Roadside Assistance phone number can be viewed on the iDrive or a connection to Roadside Assistance can be established di‐ rectly. First aid kit Note Some of the articles have a limited service life. 240 For additional information, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communi‐ cation. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Breakdown assistance Mobility Jump-starting Notes If the battery is discharged, an engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐ bles with fully insulated clamp handles. To prevent personal injury or damage to both vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐ dure. Do not touch live parts The so-called starting aid terminal in the en‐ gine compartment acts as the battery's posi‐ tive terminal. To avoid the risk of potentially fatal in‐ jury, always avoid all contact with electrical components while the engine is running.◀ Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. This infor‐ mation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ cle. 3. Switch off any electronic systems/power consumers in both vehicles. Bodywork contact between vehicles Make sure that there is no contact be‐ tween the bodywork of the two vehicles; other‐ wise, there is the danger of short circuits.◀ Starting aid terminals Connecting order Connect the jumper cables in the correct order; otherwise, there is the danger of injury from sparking.◀ The body ground or a special nut acts as the battery negative terminal. Connecting the cables 1. Pull off the cap of the BMW starting aid ter‐ minal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐ tance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the negative terminal of the battery, or to the Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 241 Mobility Breakdown assistance corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. Starting the engine Do not have the vehicle towed Have your vehicle transported on a load‐ ing platform only; otherwise, damage may oc‐ cur.◀ Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an in‐ creased idle speed. Tow truck If the vehicle being started has a diesel en‐ gine: let the engine of the assisting vehicle run for approx. 10 minutes. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle being started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not success‐ ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐ other attempt in order to allow the dis‐ charged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐ verse order. Check the battery and recharge if necessary. Tow-starting and towing Note Tow-starting and towing When tow-starting and towing the vehi‐ cle, switch off the Intelligent Safety systems; otherwise, improper behavior of the braking function of individual systems could result in an accident.◀ Switch off Intelligent Safety systems, refer to page 112. Transporting your vehicle Note Your vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Therefore, contact a service center in the event of a breakdown. 242 Do not lift the vehicle Do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage may result.◀ Towing other vehicles General information Light towing vehicle The towing vehicle must not be lighter than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, it will not be possible to control the vehicle re‐ sponse.◀ Attaching the tow bar/tow rope correctly Attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting; connecting it to other vehicle parts may cause damage.◀ ▷ Switch on the hazard warning system, de‐ pending on local regulations. ▷ If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win‐ dow. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Breakdown assistance Mobility Towing methods when towing other vehicles ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the vehicle and screw it all the way in. Tow bar ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. ▷ Use the tow fitting screwed in at the front for maneuvering the vehicle only. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please observe the following: ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g., do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. ▷ Maneuvering capability is limited during cornering. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an offset. Otherwise, damage to the tow fitting and the vehicle can occur.◀ Screw thread Tow rope When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on the vehicle components when towing, al‐ ways use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attaching the tow rope correctly Only secure the tow rope on the tow fit‐ ting; otherwise, damage can occur when it is secured on other parts of the vehicle.◀ Press on the mark of the cover to push it out. Tow fitting Automatic transmission Tow-starting Do not tow-start the vehicle. Due to the automatic transmission, the engine cannot be started by tow-starting. Have the cause of the starting difficulties rem‐ edied. The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐ ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW. It is located in the on‐ board vehicle tool kit under the cargo area floor. Tow fitting, information on use Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 243 Mobility Care Care Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Intense soiling and road salt can damage the vehicle. Automatic car washes Hints Note the following: ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. Car washes ▷ Make sure that the wheels and tires are not damaged by the transport mechanisms. Hints ▷ Fold in the exterior mirrors; otherwise, they may be damaged, depending on the width of the vehicle. Steam jets or high-pressure washers When using steam jets or high-pressure washers, hold them a sufficient distance away and use a maximum temperature of 140 ℉/60 ℃. If the vehicle has a glass sunroof, ensure that a distance of at least 31.5 inches/80 cm is main‐ tained. Holding them too close or using exces‐ sively high pressures or temperatures can cause damage or preliminary damage that may then lead to long-term damage. Follow the user's manual for the high-pressure washer.◀ Cleaning sensors/cameras with highpressure washers When using high-pressure washers, do not spray the exterior sensors and cameras, e.g., Park Distance Control, for extended periods of time and only from a distance of at least 12 in/30 cm.◀ ▷ Regularly remove foreign items such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. ▷ Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in winter. 244 ▷ Deactivate, refer to page 76,the rain sensor to avoid unintentional wiper activation. ▷ In some cases, an unintentional alarm can be triggered by the interior motion sensor of the alarm system. Follow the instruc‐ tions on avoiding an unintentional alarm, refer to page 46. Guide rails in car washes Avoid car washes with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, the vehicle body could be damaged.◀ Different types of tires Observing vehicle width Before entering washing systems, make sure that the vehicle width is not too great for the car wash; otherwise, there could be dam‐ age to the vehicle and car wash.◀ Before driving into a car wash In order to ensure that the vehicle can roll in a car wash, take the following steps: 1. Drive into the car wash. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Care 2. Engage transmission position N. 3. Switch the engine off. In this way, the ignition remains switched on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐ played. Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash Do not turn off the ignition in the car wash; otherwise, the transmission position P is engaged and damages can result.◀ To start the engine: 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Pressing the Start/Stop button without step‐ ping on the brake turns the ignition off. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in transmission position N. A signal is sounded when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. Mobility Completely remove all residues on the win‐ dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. Vehicle care Car care products BMW recommends using cleaning and care products from BMW, since these have been tested and approved. Car care and cleaning products Follow the instructions on the container. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products intended for cleaning vehi‐ cles. Cleansers can contain substances that are dangerous and harmful to your health.◀ Transmission position Vehicle paint Transmission position P is engaged automati‐ cally: Regular care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐ fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐ quency and extent of your car care to these influences. ▷ When the ignition is switched off. ▷ After approx. 15 minutes. Headlamps ▷ Do not rub dry and do not use abrasive or caustic cleansers. ▷ Soak areas that have been soiled e.g. due to insects, with shampoo and wash off with water. ▷ Thaw ice with deicing spray; do not use an ice scraper. After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action can be reduced and corrosion of the brake discs can occur. Aggressive substances, such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed immediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored. Leather care Remove dust from the leather often, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 245 Mobility Care To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, provide leather care roughly every two months. ularly when they have been exposed to road salt. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially more visible. Rubber components Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective layer of the leather surface. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing car care products in order to avoid damage or reduced noise damping. Suitable care products are available from the service center. Fine wood parts Upholstery material care Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner. Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. If they are very dirty, e.g., beverage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber cloth with a suita‐ ble interior cleaner. These include: Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the material vigorously. Damage from Velcro® fasteners Aside from water, treat only with rubber cleansers. Plastic components ▷ Imitation leather surfaces. ▷ Headliner. ▷ Lamp lenses. ▷ Instrument cluster cover. Open Velcro® fasteners on pants or other articles of clothing can damage the seat covers. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀ ▷ Matte black spray-coated components. Caring for special components Do not soak the headliner. Light-alloy wheels ▷ Painted parts in the interior. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Lightly dampen the cloth with water. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ turer's instructions. Do not use cleansers that contain alcohol or solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel, or such; this could lead to surface damage.◀ Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective layer of adjacent components, such as the brake disk. Safety belts Chrome surfaces Chemical cleaning Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ tor grille or door handles with an ample supply of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐ 246 Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Do not clean chemically; this can destroy the webbing.◀ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Care Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety belts clipped into their buckles. Do not allow the reels to retract the safety belts until they are dry. Carpets and floor mats No objects in the area around the pedals Keep floor mats, carpets, and any other objects out of the area of motion of the pedals; otherwise, the function of the pedals could be impeded while driving and create the risk of an accident. Mobility Avoid pressing too hard when cleaning and do not use abrasive materials; otherwise, damage can result.◀ Long-term vehicle storage When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. Additional information is available from the service center. Do not place additional floor mats over existing mats or other objects. Only use floor mats that have been approved for the vehicle and can be properly fixed in place. Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas‐ tened again after they were removed for clean‐ ing, for example.◀ Floor mats can be removed from the passen‐ ger compartment for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the direction of travel only. Sensors/cameras To clean sensors and cameras, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass cleaner. Displays/screens Clean the displays with an antistatic microfiber cloth. Cleaning displays Do not use chemical or household cleansers. Keep all fluids and moisture away from the unit. Otherwise, they could affect or damage surfa‐ ces or electrical components. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 247 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Reference This chapter contains the technical data and an index that will quickly take you to the information you need. Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Reference Technical data Technical data Vehicle equipment All standard, country-specific and optional equipment that is offered in the model series is described in this chapter. Therefore, equip‐ ment is also described that is not available in a vehicle, e. g., because of the selected optional equipment or country variant. This also applies for safety-related functions and systems. Dimensions BMW X5 Width with mirrors inches/mm 86.0/2,184 Width without mirrors inches/mm 76.3/1,938 Width without mirrors with 20" wheels inches/mm 78.2/1,985 Height inches/mm 69.4/1,762 Length inches/mm 193.2/4,908 Wheel base inches/mm 115.5/2,933 Smallest turning circle diam. ft/m 41.8/12.7 Weights X5 sDrive35i Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,070/2,753 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 6,350/2,880 Load lbs/kg 1,110/503 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 1,350/612 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,670/1,211 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 2,680/1,216 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,540/1,606 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 3,840/1,742 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 22.94–66.03/650–1,870 250 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Technical data Reference X5 xDrive35i Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,250/2,835 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 6,460/2,930 Load lbs/kg 1,110/503 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 1,350/612 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,820/1,279 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 2,780/1,261 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,580/1,624 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 3,840/1,742 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 22.94–66.03/650–1,870 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,550/2,971 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 6,690/3,035 Load lbs/kg 1,110/503 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 1,240/562 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,990/1,356 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 2,970/1,347 Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,700/1,678 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 22.94–66.03/650–1,870 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,400/2,903 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 6,600/2,994 Load lbs/kg 1,110/503 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 1,350/612 Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,940/1,334 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 2,910/1,320 X5 xDrive50i X5 xDrive35d Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 251 Reference Technical data X5 xDrive35d Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 3,600/1,633 With the third row of seats lbs/kg 3,850/1,746 Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 220/100 Cargo area capacity cu ft/l 22.94–66.03/650–1,870 Capacities Fuel tank 252 US gal/liters Notes 22.4/85 Fuel quality, refer to page 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Technical data Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Reference 253 Reference Everything from A to Z Everything from A to Z Index A ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ tem 131 ACC, Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go 138 Acceleration Assistant, refer to Launch Control 80 Activated-charcoal filter 168 Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion 126 Active Cruise Control with Stop & Go, ACC 138 Active Protection 128 Active roll stabilization 135 Active seat ventilation, front 53 Active Steering 134 Adaptive brake lights, refer to Brake force display 128 Adaptive Light Control 100 Additives, oil 225 Adjustments, seats/head re‐ straints 50 After washing vehicle 245 Airbags 104 Airbags, indicator/warning light 105 Air circulation, refer to Recir‐ culated-air mode 167 Air, dehumidifying, refer to Cooling function 167 Air distribution, manual 166 Air flow, automatic climate control 166 Air pressure, tires 211 Air vents, refer to Ventila‐ tion 168 Alarm system 45 Alarm, unintentional 46 254 All around the center con‐ sole 16 All around the headliner 17 All around the steering wheel 14 All-season tires, refer to Win‐ ter tires 219 All-wheel-drive 133 Alternating-code hand-held transmitter 176 Alternative oil types 226 Antifreeze, washer fluid 77 Antilock Brake System, ABS 131 Anti-slip control, refer to DSC 132 Approved axle load 250 Approved engine oils 225 Arrival time 94 Ashtray 177 Ashtray, front 177 Assistance, Roadside Assis‐ tance 240 Assistance when driving off 131 Assist system, refer to Intelli‐ gent Safety 112 Attentiveness assistant 128 AUTO H button, refer to Au‐ tomatic Hold 72 AUTO intensity 166 Automatic car wash 244 Automatic climate con‐ trol 165 Automatic Cruise Control with Stop & Go 138 Automatic Curb Monitor 60 Automatic deactivation, front passenger airbags 106 Automatic headlamp con‐ trol 100 Automatic Hold 72 Automatic locking 44 Automatic recirculated-air control 167 Automatic Soft Closing, doors 40 Automatic tailgate 40 Automatic transmission with Steptronic 78 AUTO program, automatic cli‐ mate control 166 AUTO program, intensity 166 Auto Start/Stop function 69 Average fuel consumption 94 Average speed 94 Axle loads, weights 250 B Backrest curvature, refer to Lumbar support 52 Backrest, width 53 Backup camera 153 Bad road trips 193 Band-aids, refer to First aid kit 240 Bar for tow-starting/ towing 243 Battery replacement, vehicle battery 237 Battery replacement, vehicle remote control 34 Battery, vehicle 237 Belts, safety belts 55 Beverage holder, cu‐ pholder 185 Blinds, sun protection 48 BMW Advanced Diesel 207 BMW Assist, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Everything from A to Z tertainment and Communi‐ cation BMW Homepage 6 BMW Internet page 6 BMW maintenance sys‐ tem 229 Bonus range, ECO PRO 199 Bottle holder, refer to Cu‐ pholder 185 Brake assistant 131 Brake discs, breaking in 190 Brake force display 128 Brake lamps, brake force dis‐ play 128 Brake lights, adaptive 128 Brake pads, breaking in 190 Braking, hints 192 Breakdown assis‐ tance 239, 240 Breaking in 190 Brightness of Control Dis‐ play 96 Bulb replacement 232 Bulb replacement, front 233 Bulb replacement, rear 235 Bulbs and lamps 232 Button, RES 141 Button, Start/Stop 67 Bypassing, refer to Jumpstarting 241 C California Proposition 65 Warning 7 Calling up mirror adjust‐ ment 45 Calling up seat adjust‐ ment 45 Calling up steering wheel ad‐ justment 45 Camera, care 247 Camera, Panorama View 158 Camera, rearview cam‐ era 153 Camera, Top View 156 Can holder, refer to Cu‐ pholder 185 Car battery 237 Car care products 245 Care, displays 247 Care, vehicle 245 Cargo 194 Cargo area 180 Cargo area, enlarging 180 Cargo area lid 40 Cargo area, storage compart‐ ments 186 Cargo cover 180 Cargo, securing 195 Cargo straps, securing cargo 195 Car key, refer to Remote con‐ trol 34 Carpet, care 247 Car wash 244 Catalytic converter, refer to Hot exhaust system 190 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ ice 229 CD/Multimedia, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation Center armrest 183 Center console 16 Center-Lock, see button for central locking 37 Central locking system 37 Central screen, refer to Con‐ trol Display 18 Changes, technical, refer to Safety 7 Changing parts 231 Changing wheels 235 Changing wheels/tires 218 Check Control 86 Checking the oil level elec‐ tronically 224 Children, seating position 63 Children, transporting safely 63 Reference Child restraint fixing sys‐ tem 63 Child restraint fixing system LATCH 65 Child restraint fixing systems, mounting 63 Child safety locks 66 Child seat, mounting 63 Child seats 63 Chrome parts, care 246 Cigarette lighter 177 Cleaning, displays 247 Climate control 165 Climate control wind‐ shield 191 Clock 89 Closing/opening from in‐ side 40 Closing/opening via door lock 39 Closing/opening with remote control 38 Clothes hooks 186 Coasting 200 Coasting with engine decou‐ pled, coasting 200 Coasting with idling en‐ gine 200 Cockpit 14 Cold starting, refer to Starting the engine 68 Collision warning with braking function 116 Collision warning with City Braking function 113 Combination switch, refer to Turn signals 74 Combination switch, refer to Wiper system 75 Comfort Access 43 COMFORT program, Driving Dynamics Control 137 Compact wheel 235 Compartments in the doors 183 Compass 94 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 255 Reference Everything from A to Z Computer 93 Condensation on win‐ dows 166 Condensation under the vehi‐ cle 192 Condition Based Service CBS 229 Confirmation signal 44 Congestion Assistant 145 ConnectedDrive, see user's manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communi‐ cation ConnectedDrive Services Connecting electrical devi‐ ces 178 Connection for an external audio device 184 Control Display 18 Control Display, settings 95 Controller 18, 19 Control systems, driving sta‐ bility 131 Convenient opening 38 Coolant 227 Coolant temperature 89 Cooling function 167 Cooling, maximum 167 Cooling system 227 Corrosion on brake discs 192 Cruise control 148 Cruise control, active with Stop & Go 138 Cruise Control, refer to Active Cruise Control 138 Cruising range 89 Cupholder 185 Current fuel consumption 90 D Damage, tires 218 Data, technical 250 Date 89 Daytime running lights 100 256 Defrosting, refer to Windows, defrosting 166 Dehumidifying, air 167 Departure time, parked-car heating 172 Departure time, parked-car ventilation 172 Destination distance 94 Diesel exhaust fluid, at low temperatures 208 Diesel exhaust fluid, having refilled 208 Diesel exhaust fluid, on mini‐ mum 208 Diesel exhaust fluid, replen‐ ishing yourself 208 Diesel particulate filter 191 Digital clock 89 Dimensions 250 Dimmable exterior mirrors 61 Dimmable interior rearview mirror 61 Direction indicator, refer to Turn signals 74 Display, electronic, instru‐ ment cluster 84 Display in windshield 97 Display lighting, refer to In‐ strument lighting 102 Displays 82 Displays, cleaning 247 Disposal, coolant 228 Disposal, vehicle battery 238 Distance control, refer to PDC 150 Distance information 164 Distance to destination 94 Divided screen view, split screen 24 Door lock, refer to Remote control 34 Doors, Automatic Soft Clos‐ ing 40 Downhill control 133 Drink holder, third row of seats 186 Drive-off assistant 131 Drive-off assistant, refer to DSC 132 Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 135 Driving instructions, breaking in 190 Driving mode 135 Driving notes, general 190 Driving on bad roads 193 Driving stability control sys‐ tems 131 Driving tips 190 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 132 DTC driving dynamics 133 DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ trol 133 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 132 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 133 E ECO PRO 198 ECO PRO, bonus range 199 ECO PRO display 198 ECO PRO driving mode 198 ECO PRO mode 198 ECO PRO Tip - driving in‐ struction 199 EfficientDynamics 200 Electronic displays, instru‐ ment cluster 84 Electronic Stability Program ESP, refer to DSC 132 Emergency detection, remote control 35 Emergency release, door lock 40 Emergency release, fuel filler flap 204 Emergency release, parking brake 73 Emergency Request 239 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Everything from A to Z Emergency service, refer to Roadside Assistance 240 Emergency start function, en‐ gine start 35 Energy Control 90 Energy recovery 90 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 69 Engine, automatic switchoff 69 Engine compartment 222 Engine compartment, work‐ ing in 222 Engine coolant 227 Engine idling when driving, coasting 200 Engine oil 224 Engine oil, adding 225 Engine oil additives 225 Engine oil change 226 Engine oil filler neck 225 Engine oil temperature 88 Engine oil types, alterna‐ tive 226 Engine oil types, ap‐ proved 225 Engine start during malfunc‐ tion 35 Engine start, jump-start‐ ing 241 Engine start, refer to Starting the engine 68 Engine stop 68 Engine temperature 88 Entering a car wash 244 Equipment, interior 175 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram, refer to DSC 132 Exchanging wheels/tires 218 Exhaust system 190 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 61 Exterior mirrors 60 External start 241 External temperature dis‐ play 89 External temperature warn‐ ing 89 Eyes for securing cargo 195 F Failure message, refer to Check Control 86 False alarm, refer to Uninten‐ tional alarm 46 Fan, refer to Air flow 166 Fault displays, refer to Check Control 86 Filler neck for engine oil 225 Fine wood, care 246 First aid kit 240 Fitting for towing, refer to Tow fitting 243 Flat tire, changing wheels 235 Flat Tire Monitor FTM 110 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 107 Flat tire, warning lamp 108, 111 Flooding 191 Floor carpet, care 247 Floor mats, care 247 Fold-out position, windshield wipers 77 Foot brake 192 Front airbags 104 Front center armrest 183 Front cupholder 185 Front fog lamps 102 Front fog lamps/cornering lamps, bulb replace‐ ment 233 Front fog lamps, bulb replace‐ ment 234 Front lamps 233 Front passenger airbags, au‐ tomatic deactivation 106 Front passenger airbags, indi‐ cator lamp 106 FTM Flat Tire Monitor 110 Reference Fuel 206 Fuel cap 204 Fuel consumption, current 90 Fuel consumption, refer to Average fuel consump‐ tion 94 Fuel filler flap 204 Fuel gauge 88 Fuel quality 206 Fuel recommendation 206 Fuel, tank capacity 252 Fuse 238 G Garage door opener, refer to Universal garage door opener 175 Gasoline 206 Gasoline quality 206 Gear change, automatic transmission 78 Gear shift indicator 91 General driving notes 190 Glare shield 181 Glasses compartment 184 Glass sunroof, refer to Panor‐ amic glass sunroof 48 Glove compartment 182 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ proved 250 H Handbrake, refer to Parking brake 71 Hand-held transmitter, alter‐ nating code 176 Hazard warning flashers 239 HDC Hill Descent Con‐ trol 133 Head airbags 104 Headlamp control, auto‐ matic 100 Headlamp courtesy delay fea‐ ture 99 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 257 Reference Everything from A to Z Headlamp flasher 75 Headlamp glass 233 Headlamps 233 Headlamps, care 245 Headlamp washer system 75 Headliner 17 Head restraints 50 Head restraints, front 57 Head restraints, rear 58 Head-up Display 97 Head-up Display, care 247 Heating, refer to Parked-car heating 171 Heavy cargo, stowing 195 High-beam Assistant 101 High beams 75 High beams/low beams, refer to High-beam Assistant 101 Hill Descent Control HDC 133 Hills 192 Hill start assistant, refer to Drive-off assistant 131 Hints 6 Holder for beverages 185 Homepage 6 Hood 222 Horn 14 Hot exhaust system 190 HUD Head-up Display 97 Hydroplaning 191 I Ice warning, refer to External temperature warning 89 Icy roads, refer to External temperature warning 89 Identification marks, tires 216 Identification number, refer to Important features in the en‐ gine compartment 222 iDrive 18 Ignition key, refer to Remote control 34 Ignition off 67 258 Ignition on 67 Indication of a flat tire 108, 111 Indicator and warning lamps 86 Individual air distribution 166 Individual settings, refer to Personal Profile 35 Inflation pressure, tires 211 Inflation pressure warning FTM, tires 110 Info display, refer to Com‐ puter 93 Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 108 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 111 Instrument cluster 82 Instrument cluster, electronic displays 84 Instrument lighting 102 Integrated key 34 Intelligent Emergency Re‐ quest 239 Intelligent Safety 112 Intensity, AUTO pro‐ gram 166 Interior equipment 175 Interior lamps 102 Interior lamps via remote con‐ trol 38 Interior motion sensor 46 Interior rearview mirror, auto‐ matic dimming feature 61 Internet page 6 Interval display, service re‐ quirements 90 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 235 Joystick, automatic transmis‐ sion 78 Jump-starting 241 K Key/remote control 34 Keyless Go, refer to Comfort Access 43 Key Memory, refer to Per‐ sonal Profile 35 Kickdown, automatic trans‐ mission 78 Knee airbag 104 L Lamp replacement 232 Lamp replacement, front 233 Lamp replacement, rear 235 Lamps 99 Lamps and bulbs 232 Lane departure warning 125 Lane margin, warning 125 Language on Control Dis‐ play 96 Lashing eyes, securing cargo 195 LATCH child restraint fixing system 65 Launch Control 80 Leather, care 245 LED front fog lamps, bulb re‐ placement 234 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ odes 232 Letters and numbers, enter‐ ing 25 Light alloy wheels, care 246 Light control 100 Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 232 Lighting 99 Lighting via remote con‐ trol 38 Light switch 99 Load 195 Loading 194 Lock, door 39 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Everything from A to Z Locking/unlocking from in‐ side 40 Locking/unlocking via door lock 39 Locking/unlocking with re‐ mote control 38 Locking, automatic 44 Locking, central 37 Locking, settings 44 Lock, power window 47 Locks, doors, and win‐ dows 66 Low beams 99 Low beams, automatic, refer to High-beam Assistant 101 Lower back support 52 Lower tailgate 43 Low-Sulfur Diesel 207 Luggage rack, refer to Roofmounted luggage rack 196 Lumbar support 52 M Maintenance 229 Maintenance require‐ ments 229 Maintenance, service require‐ ments 90 Maintenance system, BMW 229 Malfunction displays, refer to Check Control 86 Malfunction, self-leveling sus‐ pension 135 Manual air distribution 166 Manual air flow 166 Manual brake, refer to Parking brake 71 Manual mode, transmis‐ sion 79 Manual operation, backup camera 154 Manual operation, door lock 40 Manual operation, exterior mirrors 60 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 204 Manual operation, Park Dis‐ tance Control PDC 151 Manual operation, parking brake 73 Manual operation, Top View 157 Marking on approved tires 219 Marking, run-flat tires 220 Master key, refer to Remote control 34 Maximum cooling 167 Maximum speed, display 91 Maximum speed, winter tires 220 Measure, units of 96 Medical kit 240 Memory for seat, mirrors, steering wheel 59 Menu, EfficientDynamics 200 Menu in instrument clus‐ ter 93 Menus, operating, iDrive 18 Menus, refer to iDrive operat‐ ing concept 20 Messages, refer to Check Control 86 Microfilter 168 Minimum tread, tires 218 Mirror 60 Mirror memory 59 Mobile communication devi‐ ces in the vehicle 191 Modifications, technical, refer to Safety 7 Moisture in headlamp 233 Monitor, refer to Control Dis‐ play 18 Mounting of child restraint fix‐ ing systems 63 Moving sun shade 181 Reference Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 14 N Navigation, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication Neck restraints, front, refer to Head restraints 57 Neck restraints, rear, refer to Head restraints 58 Neutral cleaner, see wheel cleaner 246 New wheels and tires 218 Night Vision with pedestrian detection 121 No Passing Information 91 Nylon rope for tow-starting/ towing 243 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 229 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ agnosis 229 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 155 Octane rating, refer to Gaso‐ line quality 206 Odometer 89 Office, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Offroad trips 193 Oil 224 Oil, adding 225 Oil additives 225 Oil change 226 Oil change interval, service requirements 90 Oil filler neck 225 Oil types, alternative 226 Oil types, approved 225 Old batteries, disposal 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 259 Reference Everything from A to Z Onboard monitor, refer to Control Display 18 Onboard vehicle tool kit 231 Opening and closing 34 Opening and closing, from in‐ side 40 Opening and closing via door lock 39 Opening and closing, with re‐ mote control 38 Operating concept, iDrive 18 Optional equipment, standard equipment 6 Outside air, refer to Auto‐ matic recirculated-air con‐ trol 167 Overheating of engine, refer to Coolant temperature 89 P Paint, vehicle 245 Panorama Side View 158 Panoramic glass sunroof 48 Parallel parking assistant 159 Park Distance Control PDC 150 Parked-car heating 171 Parked-car ventilation 171 Parked vehicle, condensa‐ tion 192 Parking aid, refer to PDC 150 Parking assistant 159 Parking brake 71 Parking lamps 99 Parking with Auto Hold 72 Particulate filter 191 Passenger side mirror, tilting downward 60 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐ era 154 PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol 150 Pedestrian detection, refer to Night Vision 121 260 Pedestrian warning with city braking function 119 People detection, refer to Night Vision 121 Personal Profile 35 Pinch protection system, glass sunroof 49 Pinch protection system, win‐ dows 47 Plastic, care 246 Power failure 238 Power windows 46 Pressure, tire air pres‐ sure 211 Pressure warning FTM, tires 110 Preventing Auto Start Stop 70 Profile, refer to Personal Pro‐ file 35 Programmable memory but‐ tons, iDrive 24 Protective function, glass sunroof 49 Protective function, win‐ dows 47 Push-and-turn switch, refer to Controller 18, 19 Q Queuing Assistant, see Con‐ gestion Assistant 145 R Radiator fluid 227 Radio-operated key, refer to Remote control 34 Radio ready state 67 Radio, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Rain sensor 75 Rear automatic climate con‐ trol 169 Rear center armrest 184 Rear drink holder 185 Rear lamps 235 Rear socket 179 Rear ventilation, third row of seats, ventilation, third row of seats 169 Rearview mirror 60 Rear window defroster 167 Recirculated-air mode 167 Recommended tire brands 219 Refueling 204 Remaining range 89 Remote control/key 34 Remote control, malfunc‐ tion 39 Remote control, parked-car heating/ventilation 172 Remote control, univer‐ sal 175 Replacement fuse 238 Replacing parts 231 Replacing wheels/tires 218 Reporting safety defects 9 RES button 141 Reserve warning, refer to Range 89 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 108 Residual heat, automatic cli‐ mate control 167 Retaining straps, securing cargo 195 Retreaded tires 219 Roadside parking lamps 100 Roller sunblinds 48 RON gasoline quality 206 Roof load capacity 250 Roof-mounted luggage rack 196 Rope for tow-starting/ towing 243 RSC Run Flat System Com‐ ponent, refer to Run-flat tires 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Everything from A to Z Rubber components, care 246 Run-flat tires 220 S Safe braking 192 Safety 7 Safety belt reminder for driv‐ er's seat and front passen‐ ger seat 56 Safety belts 55 Safety belts, care 246 Safety Package, refer to Ac‐ tive Protection 128 Safety switch, windows 47 Safety systems, airbags 104 Saving fuel 197 Screen, refer to Control Dis‐ play 18 Screwdriver 231 Screw thread for tow fit‐ ting 243 Seat belts, refer to Safety belts 55 Seat heating, front 53 Seat heating, rear 55 Seating position for chil‐ dren 63 Seat, mirror, and steering wheel memory 59 Seats 50 Seat ventilation, front 53 Selection list in instrument cluster 93 Selector lever, automatic transmission 78 Self-leveling suspension, air suspension 135 Self-leveling suspension, malfunction 135 Sensors, care 247 Service and warranty 8 Service requirements, Condi‐ tion Based Service CBS 229 Service requirements, dis‐ play 90 Service, Roadside Assis‐ tance 240 Services, ConnectedDrive Settings, locking/unlock‐ ing 44 Settings on Control Dis‐ play 95 Settings, storing for seat, mir‐ rors, steering wheel 59 Shifting, automatic transmis‐ sion 78 Shift paddles on steering wheel 80 Shoulder support 53 Side airbags 104 Signaling, horn 14 Signals when unlocking 44 Sitting safely 50 Size 250 Ski and snowboard bag 181 Slide/tilt glass roof 48 Smoker's package 177 Snow chains 220 Socket 178 Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ nostics 229 Soot particulate filter 191 SOS button 239 Spare fuse 238 Specified engine oil types 225 Speed, average 94 Speed limit detection, on‐ board computer 94 Speed limiter, display 91 Speed Limit Information 91 Speed limit in the com‐ puter 94 Split screen 24 SPORT+ - program, Dynamic Driving Control 136 Sport automatic transmis‐ sion 80 Reference Sport displays, torque dis‐ play, performance dis‐ play 95 SPORT program, driving dy‐ namics 137 Sport program, transmis‐ sion 79 Stability control systems 131 Start/stop, automatic func‐ tion 69 Start/Stop button 67 Start function during malfunc‐ tion 35 Starting the engine 68 Status display, tires 107 Status information, iDrive 23 Status of Owner's Manual 6 Steering, Active Steering 134 Steering wheel, adjusting 61 Steering wheel heating 62 Steering wheel memory 59 Steptronic, automatic trans‐ mission 78 Stopping the engine 68 Storage compartment on the center console 183 Storage compartments 182 Storage compartments, loca‐ tions 182 Storage, tires 220 Storing the vehicle 247 Summer tires, tread 218 Sun visor 181 Supplementary text mes‐ sage 87 Surround View 153 Suspension settings 135 Switch for Dynamic Driving Control 135 Switch, refer to Cockpit 14 Symbols 6 Symbols in the status field 23 SYNC program, automatic cli‐ mate control 167 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 261 Reference Everything from A to Z T Tachometer 88 Tailgate 40 Tailgate, automatic 40 Tail lamps 235 Technical changes, refer to Safety 7 Technical data 250 Telephone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment and Communication Temperature, automatic cli‐ mate control 166 Temperature display, external temperature 89 Temperature, engine oil 88 Terminal, starting aid 241 Text message, supplemen‐ tary 87 Theft alarm system, refer to Alarm system 45 Theft protection, refer to Central locking system 37 Thermal camera, refer to Night Vision 121 Thigh support 52 Third row of seats 55 Tilt alarm sensor 46 Time of arrival 94 Tire damage 218 Tire identification marks 216 Tire inflation pressure 211 Tire inflation pressure moni‐ tor, refer to FTM 110 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 107 Tires, changing 218 Tires, everything on wheels and tires 211 Tires, run-flat tires 220 Tire tread 218 Tone, see user's manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication Tools 231 262 Top View 156 Total vehicle weight 250 Touchpad 21 Tow fitting 243 Towing 242 Tow-starting 242 TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 107 Traction control 133 TRACTION program, Dy‐ namic Driving Control 136 Transmission, automatic 78 Transporting children safely 63 Tread, tires 218 Trip computer 95 Triple turn signal activa‐ tion 74 Trip odometer 89 Turning circle lines, rearview camera 154 Turn signals, operation 74 U Unintentional alarm 46 Units of measure 96 Universal remote control 175 Unlock button, automatic transmission 79 Unlocking/locking from in‐ side 40 Unlocking/locking via door lock 39 Unlocking/locking with re‐ mote control 38 Unlocking, settings 44 Unpaved roads, cross-coun‐ try trips 193 Updates made after the edito‐ rial deadline 6 Upholstery care 246 USB interface 179 V Variable steering 134 Vehicle battery 237 Vehicle battery, replac‐ ing 237 Vehicle, breaking in 190 Vehicle care 245 Vehicle equipment 6 Vehicle identification number, refer to Identification num‐ ber in the engine compart‐ ment 222 Vehicle jack 235 Vehicle paint 245 Vehicle storage 247 Vehicle wash 244 Ventilation 168 Vertical Dynamic Control 135 Voice activation system 26 W Warning indicators 86 Warning lamps 86 Warning messages, refer to Check Control 86 Warning triangle 240 Washer fluid 77 Washer nozzles, wind‐ shield 76 Washer system 75 Washing, vehicle 244 Water on roads 191 Weights 250 Welcome lamps 99 Wheel cleaner 246 Wheels, changing 218 Wheels, everything on wheels and tires 211 Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 110 Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor TPM 107 Window defroster, rear 167 Windows, powered 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 Everything from A to Z Reference Windshield, climate con‐ trol 191 Windshield washer fluid 77 Windshield washer noz‐ zles 76 Windshield washer sys‐ tem 75 Windshield wiper 75 Windshield wipers, fold-out position 77 Winter diesel 207 Winter storage, care 247 Winter tires, suitable tires 219 Winter tires, tread 218 Wiper blades, replacing 231 Wiper fluid 77 Wiper system 75 Wood, care 246 Word match concept, naviga‐ tion 25 Wrench 231 X xDrive 133 Xenon headlamps, bulb re‐ placement 233 Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13 263 More about BMW The Ultimate Driving Machine 01 40 2 926 740 ue bmwusa.com *BL292674000Y* Online Edition for Part no. 01 40 2 926 740 - X/13